JP7434062B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

Conventional gaming machines can execute a battle effect and a timer effect at the same time as a reach effect, and during a battle effect, it is also possible to execute a slow motion effect that slows down the playback speed of the battle effect. There are some (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-99801

However, in Patent Document 1, there was room for improvement in slow motion effects.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can impress upon a player that the machine is controlled in an advantageous state .

The gaming machine of claim 1 includes:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
sound output means;
a display means having a display area capable of displaying an image and capable of displaying a display image of game-related information regarding the progress of the game in the display area;
a storage means capable of storing image data including at least a specific image displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means having a plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers; ,
A light emitting means;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state;
The display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area,
The specific performance is
The display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is announced as a performance result. including,
The performance execution means is
In the first display area, the effect video can be displayed,
In the second display area, information regarding the game can be displayed;
In the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed in the first display area,
In the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means is emitted at shorter intervals than in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode of
In the second period, after displaying the effect video progressing at the second speed, it is possible to perform a still effect that displays a still image obtained by freezing the effect video,
There are multiple production modes of the static production,
Depending on which presentation mode the static presentation is, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs,
The performance execution means is
The information display can be displayed in an operative manner,
Continuing the information display operation even while the static presentation is being executed;
It is characterized by
Other gaming machines are
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
It has a display area that can display production videos and images, and the display area displays game-related information regarding the progress of the game (for example, the number of stored first special symbols, the number of stored second special symbols, decorations, etc.). A display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a small symbol whose display area is smaller than the symbol;
a storage means (for example, CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
A plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area shown in FIG. 14-5) etc.), and is capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers (for example, display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210);
A performance execution means (e.g., Production control CPU 120),
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 14-17),
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance that is subsequent to the first period, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
The storage means changes the display position of at least some of the specific images in the display area from a first position (for example, in the case of characteristic part 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. can store display position displacement information for displacing to a different second position (for example, in the case of the characteristic part 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, the CGROM 205 can store display position displacement information (the part where image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image placed in the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23). A displacement target image is created by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance. the part that creates the image),
The effect executing means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG) of displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer where the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface Image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J are parts drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, a displacement specific image in which at least a part of a specific image displayed in a predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in a specific effect. A specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data than when image data of a specific image is exclusively stored. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from decreasing when a specific performance is executed.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, an image displayed on an image display device (display means) is broken at a specific timing such as during a reach effect during variable display, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-141396. There was something that could perform a scattering effect (specific effect). However, in such gaming machines, the effect is simply that the image breaks and scatters, so it is possible to improve the effect by performing the effect while other images are being displayed on the image display device. However, in this case, dedicated image data must be created for each image displayed on the image display device to execute the effect, and the amount of data to be stored in the storage means would be limited. There is a problem that the size may become excessively large, and in view of this point, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the amount of data stored in the storage means in order to execute a specific performance.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) capable of performing a variable display,
It has a display area that can display images, and the display area contains game-related information regarding the progress of the game (for example, the number of reserved special symbols, the number of reserved special symbols, and the small display area that is smaller than the decorative symbols). a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J);
a storage means (for example, CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
A plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area shown in FIG. 14-5) etc.), and is capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers (for example, display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210);
an effect execution means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 14-17);
Equipped with
The storage means changes the display position of at least some of the specific images in the display area from a first position (for example, in the case of characteristic part 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. can store display position displacement information for displacing to a different second position (for example, in the case of the characteristic part 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, the CGROM 205 can store display position displacement information (the part where image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image placed in the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23). A displacement target image is created by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance. the part that creates the image),
The effect executing means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG) of displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer where the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface Image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J are parts drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a displacement specific image in which at least a portion of a specific image displayed in a predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect. Therefore, compared to the case where the image data of these displacement specific images is exclusively stored, the specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from decreasing when a specific performance is executed.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing rotating display of a hold display in each hold display area, and (C) is a diagram showing moving display of a subtitle in a subtitle display area. , (D) is a diagram showing the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of a chance up effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns for still image display performance, and (B) is a diagram showing the performance contents of each performance pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns of operation promotion performance, and (B) is a diagram showing the performance contents of each performance pattern. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)3. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 1st reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 1st reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 3rd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 3rd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production in a modification. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in an effect control board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a layer configuration. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of generation of a displacement image when a displacement image is applied to a displacement target image. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of application of a displacement image to a displacement target image. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display image processing processing. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a generated image and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative symbols in a normal state, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative symbols in a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of development suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of development suggestion production. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in the development suggestion performance. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach suggestion production in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach suggestion production in a modification. It is an explanatory view of an image generated in a reach suggestion performance in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode of the revival performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance mode of the revival performance in a modification. It is an explanatory view of an image generated in a revival performance in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the display color of a crack effect image in a revival effect in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the pre-read preview performance in a modification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a prefetch preview effect in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-read preview performance in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the change pattern of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-read preview performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the promotion performance in a modification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a promotion effect in a modified example. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an image generated in a modification and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the promotion performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the promotion performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the temporary stop suggestion performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the temporary stop suggestion performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the temporary stop notification performance in a modification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification in a modified example. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of displaying a stereoscopic image in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode of the preview performance during a variable display, and development suggestion performance in a modification. It is an explanatory view when the present invention is applied to a slot machine in a modified example.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A form for implementing a pachinko gaming machine, which is a gaming machine according to the present invention, will be described below based on an example.

[form]
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A performance execution means (for example, Production control CPU 120),
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, sound effects, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
The sound output means includes a reproduction circuit for reproducing sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis), an amplification circuit for amplifying the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit (for example, amplification circuit 079SG134), and a sound that is amplified by the amplification circuit. The device is characterized in that it includes speakers (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that output the sound.
According to this feature, highly reproducible performance sound can be output from the speaker at an appropriate volume.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1 or Form 2,
The performance execution means is capable of outputting a speed related to a performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance by the sound output means during a predetermined period in the second period at the same speed as in the first period; In a specific period after the period, the sound output means can output at a speed different from the first period (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the second reach effect, etc.) can be output at a speed different from the first period. In the first half of the second half execution period of each reach performance of the 3rd reach performance and the 4th reach performance, the speaker is used as in the first half execution period of each reach performance of the 1st reach performance, the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance. While the production sound is output from 8L and 8R at the playback speed V4, in the second half of the execution period of the second half of each reach performance of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the playback speed is V4. (For example, the part where the production sound is output at a playback speed different from the playback speed V4 (for example, playback speed V5 slower than V4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the speed of the effect sound can be made different for a specific period within the second period in which the effect video is displayed at the second speed, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
The production sound corresponding to the predetermined production includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion where BGM (music) and sound effects can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the game's interest through the performance sound including music and sound effects.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 4,
comprising a light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9) capable of emitting light and changing the light emission mode at least in the first period and the second period;
The effect execution means is capable of changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in the second period at a shorter cycle than the first period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, As shown in 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and the second half of the fourth reach performance, each execution period of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance and the fourth reach performance (The part where the game effect lamp 9 flashes at a shorter cycle than the execution period of the first half of the reach effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the period of change of the light emitting mode of the light emitting means becomes shorter (faster) in the second period when the progress speed of the performance is slow, thereby improving the performance effect of the second period.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner and capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
The display areas that can display the effect animation include a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area that is closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
A predetermined effect (e.g., reach effect) in which an effect animation of a character is displayed in the first display area and an effect sound is outputted by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the effect animation of the character; Information display that operates the information display related to the variable display (for example, rotating display of the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2(B), 2(C); moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
Regarding the information presentation, it is possible to perform an information presentation in which the information display operates at the same operating speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIGS. 10-19 to 10- 25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect, the rotating display of the hold display is rotated at the rotation speed V3. , the part where the movement of the caption is displayed at the movement speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, but the operating speed of the information display and the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance change between the first period and the second period. Since it does not change from period to period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine described in Form 6,
The total area of the first display area is larger than the total area of the second display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the area of the second display area 079SG005Sa). (a portion wider than the combined area of the area and the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to more easily recognize the predetermined presentation than the information presentation, thereby improving the player's enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine described in Form 6 or Form 7,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an information effect in which the information display always operates at the same operating speed during at least a variable display period other than the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. -18 to Figure 10-25, during the period other than during the reach effect, the rotating display of the pending display is executed at rotation speed V3 in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop In display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the caption is executed at movement speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the operating speed of information display does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 6 to 8,
The information presentation includes a moving display presentation that sequentially moves and displays information indicating the state of the presentation in the variable display being executed in the second display area (for example, a moving display of a message according to the gaming state in the telop display area 079SG005T). ),
The effect execution means is capable of executing a moving display effect that moves and displays the information display so that at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2(C)). As shown, the characters included in the message in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end their display, and at the same time they are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T and move to the left again. (the part that is moved towards the right)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the moving display effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, an amplifier circuit 079SG134) mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13,
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), and a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification performance (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance) that informs whether or not a privilege will be awarded after the execution of the predetermined performance. ,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
Within the second period, it is possible to perform an effect production that is different from the predetermined production and that enhances the production effect of the predetermined production (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, FIG. 10-21, and FIG. As shown in 10-28, the part that executes the effect production of displaying concentrated lines on the image display device 5 during the second half execution period of the second reach effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the second period, and to make the players aware by the effect production that the second period has ended and the notification production will be executed. It's easy to do.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The performance execution means is
The effect production may be performed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of effectiveness for enhancing the production effect of the predetermined production (for example, a mode in which concentrated lines are displayed as shown in FIG. 10-28(C), and a mode as shown in FIG. 10-28(D)). As shown in FIG.
As the second period progresses from the start point to the end point, it is possible to execute the effect production in a manner in which the degree of effectiveness of enhancing the production effect increases sequentially (for example, FIG. 10-28(C) and FIG. 10-28( As shown in D), the number of concentrated lines increases as the battle progresses.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the mode of the effect production changes to a mode in which the degree of effectiveness of increasing the production effect of the predetermined production increases sequentially, the effect production indicates that the notification production will be executed at the end of the second period. This makes it easier for people to recognize the information.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 11,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner and capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
The display areas that can display the effect animation include a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area that is closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect), a notification effect that informs whether or not a benefit will be awarded after execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a jackpot notification effect and a loss notification effect), and specific information related to the variable display in the second display area. Effects (for example, rotating display of the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SG005D and second pending storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2(B), or in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C)) a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a moving display of a subtitle;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video whose performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, During the execution period of the first half of each of the 1st reach performance, the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of each of the 1st reach effect, 2nd reach effect, 3rd reach effect, and 4th reach effect, the progress speed of the video of each reach effect is (portion displayed on the image display device 5 at V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
The notification effect can be executed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, FIG. 10-26(G), FIG. 10-29(E), FIG. 10-30(D), As shown in FIG. 10-31 (G) and FIG. 10-35 (C), when the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination as a jackpot notification effect, the jackpot is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. (The part that displays the image of the notification effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by executing the notification effect in a wide display area that combines the first display area and the second display area, it is possible to notify the player that a privilege has been awarded. It can be easily recognized by players.

Form 13 is the gaming machine according to form 12,
The performance execution means is
A first display that operates within the second display area (for example, a hold display) and a second display that does not operate within the second display area (for example, a first hold storage display area 079SG005D and a second hold storage display area 079SG005U) ) can be displayed in the specific information presentation,
The notification effect can be executed in the second display area where the first display and the second display are erased (for example, FIG. 10-26(G), FIG. 10-29(E), FIG. 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (G), and Figure 10-35 (C), when executing the jackpot notification effect, the hold display, the first hold memory display area 079SG005D, the second hold memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification effect is executed in the second display area where not only the first display that operates but also the second display that does not operate is erased, thereby further increasing the visibility of the notification effect in the second display area. be able to.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 13,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner and capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
As display areas that can display the effect animation, a first display area (for example, first display area 079SG005F), a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, second display area 079SG005Sa), A display means (for example, image display device 5) including
A benefit granting means (for example, the CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach performance), a notification performance that notifies whether or not a benefit will be awarded after execution of the predetermined performance (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a miss notification performance), and an information performance related to variable display in the second display area. (For example, the rotating display of the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2(B), or the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C) A production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120) that can execute
Equipped with
The display means can change the visibility of the first display area and the second display area (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-2, in addition to the first display area 079SG005F, the second display area a portion that can reduce the visibility of the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb),
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video whose performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, During the execution period of the first half of each of the 1st reach performance, the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of each of the 1st reach effect, 2nd reach effect, 3rd reach effect, and 4th reach effect, the progress speed of the video of each reach effect is (portion displayed on the image display device 5 at V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
During the pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined performance to the execution of the notification performance, the visibility of the first display area changes, but the visibility of the second display area does not change (for example, modification 079SG -2, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by changing the visibility of the first display area during the pre-notification period, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the timing at which the notification effect is executed. Since the visibility of the second display area does not change, it is also possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation.

Form 15 is the gaming machine according to Form 14,
The display means is a means capable of generating an image to be displayed, and includes a first drawing layer (for example, second image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the first display area, and a first drawing layer from the first drawing layer. is an upper drawing layer, and includes a second drawing layer (e.g., first image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the second display area. control unit 123);
The visibility of the first display area is changed by changing the visibility of the image drawn by the image generation means in the first drawing layer (for example, as shown in Modification 079SG-2, the visibility of the image drawn in the first drawing layer is changed by the second image data (a portion that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea that is drawn as an image)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, only the visibility of the first display area can be accurately changed without changing the visibility of the second display area.

Form 16 is the gaming machine according to Form 15,
The image generation means adjusts the visibility of the image to be drawn in the first drawing hierarchy from a specific position away from an area corresponding to the second display area in the first drawing hierarchy to an area corresponding to the second display area. (For example, as shown in modification example 079SG-2, the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of the second image data is moved from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa. (The part that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by drawing in an enlarged manner toward the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the first drawing layer changes over a predetermined period from a specific position to an area corresponding to the second display area. The visibility of the area can be made difficult to change.

Form 17 is a gaming machine according to any one of Forms 14 to 16,
Equipped with a motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player,
The performance execution means is
The notification effect can be executed based on the detection of the player's movement by the movement detection means (for example, the jackpot game state is controlled based on the player's operation of the push button 31B, or the jackpot game (a part that can notify that it is not controlled by the state),
It is possible to execute a movement promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion effect) that prompts a player's movement by displaying a movement promotion image in the first display area for executing the notification effect;
Although the visibility of the performance video of the predetermined performance decreases, the visibility of the action promotion performance does not decrease (for example, although the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F decreases due to the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F decreases, The visibility of the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as data images does not decrease)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the motion promotion performance stand out from the predetermined performance, so that it is possible to effectively urge the player to perform the motion.

Form 18 is a gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner and capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
The display areas that can display the effect animation include a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area that is closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, reach effect), an information effect that notifies whether or not a benefit will be awarded after the end of the predetermined effect, and an information effect that operates an information display related to the variable display in the second display area (for example, FIG. 10- Rotating display of the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SG005D and second pending storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 2(B), and moving display of the subtitle in the subtitle display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C)) A possible production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video whose performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, During the execution period of the first half of each of the 1st reach performance, the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of each of the 1st reach effect, 2nd reach effect, 3rd reach effect, and 4th reach effect, the progress speed of the video of each reach effect is (portion displayed on the image display device 5 at V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
A pre-notification performance that displays a specific still image corresponding to a stoppage of the progress of the predetermined performance being executed in the first display area during a pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined performance to the execution of the notification performance. (For example, still image display effect)
The information display operation in the second display area continues even during the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, even during the still image display performance execution period, the first pending The rotating display of the pending display in the storage display area 079SG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U, and the part where the moving display of the subtitle continues in the subtitle display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by displaying the specific still image in the first display area during the pre-notification period, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed. In addition, since the information display operation in the second display area continues, it is possible to prevent the information presentation from becoming difficult to recognize due to the information display operation stopping.

Form 19 is the gaming machine according to Form 18,
The specific still image is an image obtained by changing the color of the still image of the predetermined effect whose progress has been stopped (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 and 10-29(A) to 10-29(B)). As shown, the color of the still image is inverted when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific still image displayed in the first display area has a different color from the still image of the predetermined effect, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the notification effect is being executed.

Form 20 is the gaming machine according to form 19,
Regarding the image of the information effect displayed in the second display area, the color does not change during the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), the still image display effect is pattern SG- 2, the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted, but the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and the color of the still image displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are inverted. (The color of the 4th pattern is not reversed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information performance when the pre-announcement performance is executed (the color of the information performance image does not change, so if the color changes (This makes it easier to recognize that it is a specific still image.)

Form 21 is a gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
A display means capable of displaying a directed video (for example, an image display device 5),
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), and a performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification performance (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance) that informs whether or not a privilege will be awarded after the execution of the predetermined performance.
Equipped with
The predetermined performance includes a first section (for example, a first reach performance and a third reach performance) and a second section after the first section (for example, a second reach performance and a fourth reach performance),
The first section and the second section each refer to the first period (for example, the first half execution period of the first reach effect, the first half execution period of the second reach effect, the first half execution period of the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect). (first half performance period) and a second period after the first period (for example, first reach performance second half execution period, second reach performance second half execution period, third reach performance second half execution period, fourth reach performance second half execution period) including the second half of the reach performance (execution period),
The performance execution means is
In the first period, it is possible to display on the display means an effect video in which the progress speed of the effect is a first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach effect, the first reach effect, etc. During the execution period of the first half of each of the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In the second period, it is possible to display on the display means an effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is at a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25). , a portion where the video of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. ),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
A first pattern in which the predetermined effect is transferred to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, the variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, or the variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25) and a second pattern that ends without moving to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, the super reach shown in FIGS. 10-18 and 10-19). The present invention is characterized in that it can be executed by variable display of α1 and super reach α2, and variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2 shown in FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23).
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, the predetermined effect can be executed at the second speed in the first section and then move to the second section, or the predetermined effect can be executed without moving to the second section. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the game ends and whether or not the predetermined performance is executed at the second speed in the second section and a bonus is awarded, the game's interest can be improved.

Form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The performance execution means is
A termination suggestion effect that suggests that the predetermined effect ends in the first section without moving to the second section (for example, when an ally character is defeated by an enemy character).
The end suggestion effect and the predetermined effect when transitioning from the first section to the second section can be executed at the same progress speed (for example, Fig. 10-19, Fig. 10-20, Fig. 10-21 , as shown in FIGS. 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance and the second half of the third reach performance, the production in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and the first (a part in which the second half of the reach performance execution period or the second half execution period of the third reach performance is executed at the progress speed V1),
When notifying that a privilege will be given in the notification performance, it is possible to display a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is at a third speed in the first notification period of the notification performance on the display means, and In a second notification period that is later than the first notification period, an effect video having a fourth speed slower than the third speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 10-18, FIG. 10-20, FIG. -22, Figure 10-24, Figure 10-25, Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) to Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 ( B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure 10-35 (C), as shown in The part that displays the video when the enemy character collapses due to the attack being hit at the progress speed V2),
When notifying that no benefits will be given in the notification performance, the performance video at the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the performance video at the fourth speed during the second notification period. (For example, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10 -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to 10-32 (G), and Figures 10-35 (D) to 10-35 (F), the videos of when a friendly character collapses. (The part where the display is executed at the progress speed V1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the progressing speed of the predetermined performance when moving to the second section is the same as the progressing speed of the end-suggesting performance, the progressing speed when moving to the second section is the same as the progressing speed of the end-suggesting performance. By being different, it is possible to prevent expectations for the award of the benefit from becoming excessively high, and when it is announced that the benefit will not be awarded, the 4th speed performance video will not be displayed. It is also possible to prevent the player's dissatisfaction from increasing excessively, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 22,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
a motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), a movement promotion effect (for example, operation promotion effect) that encourages the player to perform a movement, and a notification effect (for example, , a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
When the performance video of the predetermined performance is being displayed at the second speed in the second period, the movement promotion performance can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, 4. The part where the operation promotion performance is executed when the video display of the reach performance is being executed at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of the reach performance)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, since the predetermined presentation progresses at the second speed while the movement promotion presentation is being executed during the second period, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the predetermined presentation. can.

The gaming machine of Form 24 is the gaming machine according to Form 23,
The movement promotion effect includes a valid detection period notification effect (for example, a display of a meter 079SG005M indicating an operation inheritance period of the push button 31B) for notifying a valid detection period during which the detection of the player's movement by the movement detection means is accepted. ,
When the effective detection period ends, the performance execution means detects a movement of the player by the movement detection means within the effective detection period from a timing later than the end of the effective detection period. It is possible to perform the same notification effect as in the case of push (The part that executes the same jackpot notification performance or loss notification performance based on the end of the operation reception period for the button 31B or the player's operation of the push button 31B)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, if the motion detection means does not detect the player's motion, the notification effect will not be executed before the effective detection period has elapsed, so the motion detection means will detect the player's motion. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the benefit will be awarded during the validity detection period.

The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 24,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification performance (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance) that informs whether or not a privilege will be awarded after the end of the predetermined performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
When notifying that a privilege will be given in the notification performance, it is possible to display a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is at a third speed in the first notification period of the notification performance on the display means, and In a second notification period that is later than the first notification period, an effect video having a fourth speed slower than the third speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 10-18, FIG. 10-20, FIG. -22, Figure 10-24 and Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) to Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) to Figure 10 -30(D), Figures 10-31(E) to 10-31(G), and Figures 10-35(A) to 10-35C), in the jackpot notification performance, the attack of an ally character The part of the video where the character hits the enemy character is displayed at a progressing speed of V1, while the part of the video where the enemy character falls is displayed at a progressing speed of V2).
When notifying that no benefits will be given in the notification performance, the performance video at the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the performance video at the fourth speed during the second notification period. (For example, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10 As shown in -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to 10-32 (G), and Figures 10-35 (D) to 10-35 (F), the video of the failure notification effect is moving at a different speed. (Part displayed in V1)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, when the award of benefits is announced as a notification effect, a presentation video with the progress speed at the 4th speed is displayed, so that the benefits are awarded. It is possible to impress on the player what has been done by the performance video of the notification performance.

The gaming machine of Form 26 is the gaming machine according to Form 25,
The effect execution means executes a special effect (for example, a still image display effect in which the color of the still image is inverted (pattern SG-16) as shown in FIG. 10-16) during the second period only when a benefit is given. A game machine characterized by being capable of performing the still image display effect (2)).
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the special effect will be executed.

The gaming machine of Form 27 is the gaming machine according to Form 26,
The benefit granting means provides a first benefit (for example, a jackpot game state with a non-probability variable jackpot) and a second benefit (for example, a jackpot game state with a probability variable jackpot) that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit. It is possible to grant
The performance execution means is capable of executing a special performance (for example, a revival performance shown in Modified Example 079SG-4) that notifies that a benefit will be provided after once notifying that the benefit will not be provided in the notification performance. ,
When the special performance is executed during the second period and the notification performance informs that a benefit will be awarded, the second benefit is awarded (for example, as shown in Modification 079SG-4, When the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 and the jackpot notification effect is executed, the part that is controlled to a jackpot game state with a probability variable jackpot),
When the special performance is performed during the second period and after the notification performance informs that no benefits will be awarded, the first benefit or the second benefit is granted. (For example, as shown in modification 079SG-4, if the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the failure notification effect is executed once, and then the resurrection effect is executed, the jackpot is a non-probable variable jackpot. (Some parts are controlled in a gaming state and others are controlled in a jackpot gaming state with a probability of variable jackpot.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, after the special performance is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the award of a benefit will be announced in the notification performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 28 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 27,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
a motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), a first movement promotion image (for example, operation promotion image 079SG005Ba), and a second movement promotion image different from the first movement promotion image (for example, operation promotion image 079SG005Bb). A movement promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion effect) that displays on the display means to encourage the player to perform a movement, and a judgment as to whether or not a privilege is given based on the detection of the player's movement by the movement detection means. A performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification performance to be notified (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
The operation promotion effect can be executed after the start of the second period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, the operation promotion effect is executed during the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect) part),
When performing the movement promotion effect using the first movement promotion image, the first movement promotion image is displayed while visually displaying the effect animation of the predetermined effect on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33). As shown, when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the effect image 079SG005E having transparency is also displayed, so the player can see the battle performance through the effect image 079SG005E).
When performing the movement promotion effect using the second movement promotion image, the display means displays the effect animation of the predetermined effect in a manner that makes it more difficult to see than the first movement promotion image. , the second operation promotion image is displayed in a display area wider than the display area of the first operation promotion image (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-34, operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is larger in size than operation promotion image 079SG005Ba). When displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, the transparency of the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is 0%, so the visibility of the battle performance is lower than when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed),
The rate at which benefits are given when the second operation promotion image is displayed is higher than when the first operation promotion image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb The rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when is displayed is lower than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the first movement promotion image and the second movement promotion image is displayed as the movement promotion effect. You can improve your interest in gaming.

The gaming machine of Form 29 is the gaming machine according to Form 28,
The effect execution means is capable of displaying an effect animation of the predetermined effect whose progress speed is the second speed on the display means while the first motion promotion image is being displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, FIG. 10-25 and FIGS. 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba as the operation promotion effect, while the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the battle effect (The part where the presentation video is displayed at the progress speed V2)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, since the performance moving image of the predetermined performance is displayed at the second speed while the first action promotion image is being displayed, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 29,
The performance execution means is
As the predetermined effects, a first predetermined effect (for example, a first reach effect and a third reach effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second reach effect and a fourth reach effect) can be performed, and the first After the execution of the first specific section (for example, the first half execution period of the first reach effect and the first half execution period of the third reach effect) in the predetermined effect, the second specific section after the first specific section (for example, the first reach effect) is executed. It is possible to transition to the second half of the performance period and the second half of the third reach performance),
A first specific pattern (for example, super reach α1 shown in FIG. 10-18) in which the predetermined effect is notified of the granting of a benefit without moving to the second specific section after the first specific section of the first predetermined effect is executed. and a variable display of super reach β1 shown in FIG. , the variable display of the super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 and the super reach β3 shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25), the first specific section of the first predetermined effect and the first A third specific pattern (for example, the variable display of super reach α2 shown in FIG. 10-19 or the variable display of super reach β2 shown in FIG. 10-23) that ends the predetermined effect after execution with the second specific section, is feasible and
both when transitioning from the first specific section of the first predetermined performance to the second specific section and when transitioning from the second specific section of the first predetermined performance to the second predetermined performance. A performance video whose progress speed is the second speed is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, from the execution period of the first half of the first reach performance to the second half of the first reach performance) When transitioning to the execution period, When transitioning from the first half of the first reach performance to the first half of the second reach performance, When transitioning from the first half of the third reach performance to the second half of the third reach performance , when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the fourth reach performance, the performance video of each reach performance is executed at the progress speed V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound is output at the same speed in both the first specific section and the second specific section of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect. (For example, as shown in Figures 10-18 to 10-25, when transitioning from the first half execution period of the first reach effect to the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second half execution period of the first reach effect changes When transitioning to the execution period of the first half of the reach performance, When transitioning from the execution period of the first half of the third reach performance to the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance, From the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach performance (The part where BGM and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at playback speed V4, same as in other periods)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes when transitioning from the first specific section to the second specific section of the first predetermined performance, and when transitioning from the second specific section to the second predetermined performance. However, since the output speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change when transitioning from the first specific section of the first predetermined performance to the second specific section or from the second specific section to the second predetermined performance, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by changing the progressing speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance to the second speed, the player can easily recognize the branching of the predetermined performance.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", it is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, control may be made to change the probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. You can.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It can also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 079SG)
Next, the feature section 079SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the audio control board 13 in the feature section 079SG has an audio synthesis board 13 that works together with the performance control CPU 120 to generate sounds (performance sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is equipped with an IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 that amplifies the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and an audio data ROM079SG133. Based on the performance control command, the sound number data is output to the voice synthesis IC079SG132, and the voice synthesis IC079SG132 is made to generate a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the performance control CPU 120, the sound synthesis IC079SG132 generates sounds and sound effects for each of the speakers 8L and 8R individually according to the input sound number data, and sends them to the amplifier circuit 079SG134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC079SG132, and outputs the amplified sound to each speaker 8L and 8R.

The audio data ROM079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting a sound corresponding to the performance executed by the performance command to which the sound number data corresponds in association with the sound number data. . In other words, these control data include the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from each speaker 8L and 8R during the performance period (for example, decorative pattern variable display period). is a collection of data including audio data etc. described in chronological order.

FIG. 10-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature section 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in the feature portion 079SG is formed into a rectangular shape with a height L and a width L from side to side when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decorative symbols, a ready-to-reach effect, an operation promotion effect described later, and a still image display effect. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reservation storage display area 079SG005D in which the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed by the number of reservation displays in an outlined circle, and a second reservation storage number of special symbols can be displayed in white. A second display area 079SG005Sa is configured including a second hold storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed depending on the number of circular hold displays, and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop that indicates the gaming status.

That is, a portion of the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

Note that the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display game-related information (pending display, telop display, fourth symbol This is the display area where the number of reserved memories is displayed. In other words, the second display area 079SG005Sa and third display area 079SG005Sb in the feature section 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 displays a fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol pending memory number, and a display of the second special symbol pending memory number. 3 display area 079SG005Sb.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The horizontal width is formed to have the same length as the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. Further, the third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and horizontal width are extremely shorter than the height H and the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. There is.

Therefore, in this feature section 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F that occupies the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. .

As shown in FIG. 10-2(B), in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pending display operation process (see FIG. 8-13), which will be described later. As a result, each pending display can be displayed rotating around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotational speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 10-2(C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the performance control CPU 120 executes the telop operation process (see FIG. 10-13), which will be described later, so that the telop display area 079SG005T can be adjusted depending on the gaming state and the performance being executed. A message (for example, a message depending on the state of the effect such as "In XX mode!" if a specific reach effect is in progress) is moved from the left to the right at a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3). It can be displayed simultaneously.

Furthermore, when the characters included in the message according to the gaming state reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and the display ends, they are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T and move from the left to the right again. be moved in a direction. Therefore, when a message corresponding to the gaming state is being moved and displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the gaming state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can It is now easier to recognize the current gaming status.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, a form is provided in which the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the hold display in the first hold memory display area 079SG005D and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are at different constant speeds. It may also be possible to rotate and move.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and these upper symbol 079SG005Ja and lower symbol 079SG005Jb flash alternately at a constant cycle. This indicates that special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, for these upper pattern 079SG005Ja and lower pattern 079SG005Jb, if the variable display result is a loss, both will be turned off (turned OFF) at the end timing of the variable display, while the variable display result will be a jackpot or a loss. In this case, both lights are turned on (turned ON) at the end timing of the variable display.

In addition, the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are based on the timing at which a new pending memory occurs and the timing at which a new variable display starts. This is a display in which only the number changes. In other words, the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U. , unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of variable display.

Next, the display control section 123 in the feature section 079SG will be explained. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 is capable of displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display multiple types of image data. By arranging the images and displaying the images on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When not displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. The predetermined image is not displayed on the production screen by controlling the image based on the data not to be displayed on the production screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(A), image data 1 displays the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and displays the fourth This is data drawn to display the pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn to display a small pattern of the image data 1 decorative pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 10-3(B), image data 2 is data drawn to display images of a chance-up effect, a still image display effect, and an operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. .

As shown in FIG. 10-3(C), image data 3 is data drawn to display a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(C), these image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 have display priorities for displaying the images on the image display device 5. is set. As for the display priority, image data 1 is set to be the highest and image data 3 is set to be the lowest (display priority of images in the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). . That is, in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as a lower layer image. The image is displayed as a lower layer (lowest layer) image than the image based on image data 1 and the image based on image data 2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-3(D), in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 2 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3, and an image based on image data 1 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3. The image based on image data 2 and the image based on image data 3 are displayed with priority.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-3(D), when an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3 are displayed on the image display device 5 at the same time, the image data 3 Since the image based on the image data 3 is displayed as the lowest hierarchical image, the image based on the image data 3 may be at least partially difficult to see or become invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, although details will be described later, images based on image data 1 and image data 2 are always displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images whose progress speed is constant, while images based on image data 3 The image based on the image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a moving image or a still image at a plurality of advancing speeds based on data stored in the CGROM in advance.

In particular, with this feature section 079SG, details will be described later, but during the super reach reach effect, the video of the reach effect can be displayed at the normal progress speed V1 and the progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. It becomes. This is because the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 and the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, only the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and by performing predetermined processing on the data, a part of the effect video for the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may also be possible to display it.

In this way, in this feature section 079SG, by setting the video progress speed, which is the speed at which the performance video changes, to V1, the non-slow motion period, where the progress speed of the ready-to-reach performance perceived by the player is the fast first speed, and the video By setting the progressing speed to V2, which is slower than V1, a slow motion period is set in which the progressing speed of the ready-to-reach effect recognized by the player is at a second slow speed. In other words, a slow-motion video that is a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance in this feature section 079SG is slow is that the video progresses compared to a non-slow-motion video whose video progress speed is V1, which is displayed before the slow-motion video. It is fine as long as it is slow.

Note that this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects (see Figures 10-18 to 10-25), but the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, for example, the content of the effect video displayed on the image display device 5 as a super reach effect is the same as the content of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, but the video progress speed By executing a super reach performance that does not change from V1 to V2, that is, a slow motion period, the super reach performance shown in Figures 10-18 to 10-25 becomes a slow motion period. It may be made easier for the player to recognize.

In other words, when performing a super reach effect in which the content of the effect video is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect video at the second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention This means that by displaying a video with the same content at a video progression speed V2 that is slower than the video progression speed V1 in a non-slow motion super reach performance, the animation will be displayed for a longer period of time than in a non-slow motion super reach performance. The displayed performance video corresponds to this.

As described above, this feature section 079SG configures a slow-motion effect in which the progress speed of the reach effect felt by the player is slow by slowing down the video progress speed of the effect video, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is Although the output of the output does not change from the playback speed V3, the present invention is not limited to this. By conversely speeding up the playback speed of the sound output from the game effect lamp 9 and the light emission period of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion that makes the player feel that the progress speed of the ready-to-win performance has slowed down may be constructed.

In other words, the pachinko game machine 1 in this feature section 079SG is equipped with a plurality of performance output means including a display means capable of displaying a performance video, and the speed of progress of the performance by at least one performance output means among these performance output means. Any technique may be used as long as it can make the player recognize that the performance being executed is slow motion during the slow motion period by making the difference between the slow motion period and the non-slow motion period.

In addition, although this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which the display of the reach effect animation is always executed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion The period may be such that the progress speed of the display of the reach effect animation can be changed (for example, the progress speed may gradually decrease over time, or the progress speed may increase or decrease within a predetermined range).

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this feature section 079SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 10-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", a "big hit", or a "small hit". Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state where probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variation. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a jackpot opening notification command that notifies that the jackpot is open during the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command that the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are executed when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 10-4(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or some of these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this feature section 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " 997'' range.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display device 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 10-6(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 079SG, a common special figure display result judgment table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 shows variable display results in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 079SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 079SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more judgment values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 079SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 079SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 10-6(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 079SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows an example of the structure of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 079SG determines whether the jackpot type is one of multiple types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is decided to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "jackpot". This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 079SG using FIG. 10-7(B), in this feature section 079SG, as jackpot types, high accuracy control and time saving control are performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C" are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, only the time saving control is executed and the state changes to a low probability high base state. A transitional “non-probable jackpot” is set.

The jackpot game state based on "probable variable jackpot A" is a jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). The jackpot game state based on the "probable variable jackpot B" is a jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds). The jackpot game state based on the "probable variable jackpot C" is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed in two rounds (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds). Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. The "non-probable variable jackpot" is sometimes referred to as the 2-round (2R) non-probable variable jackpot.

Also, although not particularly illustrated, the small winning game state in this feature section 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the opening time is the same as the variable jackpot C. This is the open period (0.1 seconds in this feature part 079SG). Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

The high-precision control and time-saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming states of Probable Variable Jackpot A, Probable Variable Jackpot B, and Probable Variable Jackpot C are continuously executed until a jackpot occurs again after the corresponding jackpot gaming state ends. . Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot A or variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. This occurs continuously, resulting in a so-called consecutive home situation.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 079SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 10-7 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a special game or not, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a definite jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot type of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the type of jackpot may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 10-8 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 079SG. In this feature part 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect is executed. Note that although this feature section 079SG only provides one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. It may be provided. Furthermore, a plurality of super reach variation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . .

Incidentally, the variation patterns in this feature section 079SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small win".

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 079SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as will be described later, the type of these fluctuation patterns is determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and the random number MR3 for determining the type of variation may be provided. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random number value, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 079SG. In this feature section 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-5 (Super Reach β3 jackpot fluctuation pattern). In addition, if the variable display result is Probable Variable Jackpot A or Probable Variable Jackpot B, select Variation Pattern Judgment Table B for Jackpot, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (Normal Reach Jackpot) using the Variation Pattern Judgment Table A for Jackpot. (variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the numbers of determination values assigned to PB1-2 to PB1-5 are different between the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 to PB1-3, 300 to PB1-4, and 500 to PB1-5. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 to PB1-3, 315 to PB1-4, and 515 to PB1-5. In other words, in this feature section 079SG, when the variable display result is a variable jackpot, the percentage of PB1-3 and PB1-4, which are the super reach β system variation patterns, is higher than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. Since the variation pattern in the variable display is determined as follows, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special win fluctuation pattern determination table, and use the special win fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the fluctuation pattern as PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern). do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern determination table B for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table B, change the variation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α2 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern determination table C for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α2 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α2 deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach α3 deviation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is off) and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 079SG is "off", the special figure is The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-8, the reach performance of Super Reach α1 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first reach performance, which will be described later, is executed. This is a reach effect where the display result is a jackpot, and the reach effect of Super Reach α2 (the reach effect executed with the variable display of variable pattern PA2-2) executes the first half and the second half of the first reach effect, which will be described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is off after the change, and the reach effect of Super Reach α3 (the reach effect executed with variable display in variable pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach effect described later. This is a ready-to-win performance in which a second ready-to-win performance, which will be described later, is further executed after the first half and the second half of the performance are executed, and the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss.

Regarding the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in Figures 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the more variable the display. It is set so that the percentage of the result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is high. In other words, for the variable displays of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot after being executed up to the second reach effect is The variable display result is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, the reach performance of Super Reach β1 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PB1-4) is a reach performance in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot after the first half of the third reach performance, which will be described later, is executed. Yes, the reach performance of Super Reach β2 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PA2-4) has a variable display result that is off after the first half and the second half of the third reach performance, which will be described later, are executed. This is a reach effect, and the reach effect of Super Reach β3 (the reach effect executed with variable display in variable pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) executes the first half and the second half of the third reach effect, which will be described later. After that, a fourth ready-to-win presentation, which will be described later, is further executed, and the variable display result is a ready-to-win presentation in which the result is a jackpot or a loss.

Regarding the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5, as shown in Figures 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the more variable the display. It is set so that the percentage of the result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is high. In other words, for the variable displays of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, the percentage of variable display results that are executed up to the 4th reach effect and the variable display result becomes a jackpot is The variable display result is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the second reach effect is always performed after the first reach effect, and the fourth reach effect is always executed after the third reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the second ready-to-win performance and the fourth ready-to-win performance may be executed alone.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, during variable display, each reach effect can be executed in combination of the first reach effect and the second reach effect, and can be executed in combination with the third reach effect and the fourth reach effect. Although possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to these, and the reach effect may be combined with combinations other than these combinations (for example, the first reach effect and the fourth reach effect, the second reach effect and the third reach effect). A case may also be provided in which this is executed in combination with a reach effect, etc.).

In addition, in this feature part 069SG, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variation patterns of the super reach β series (variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally the same as those of the super reach α series. The proportion of variable display results that become jackpots (jackpot expectation level) is set higher than the variation patterns (variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3). Although not limited to, some of the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach β series (variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach α series (variation patterns PA2- 2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) may have a lower jackpot expectation.

The RAM 102 in this feature section 079SG includes a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. , a game control timer setting section 079SG153, a game control counter setting section 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 079SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 079SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 079SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal figure reservation storage section 079SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 079SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 079SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 has an area for holding various data used for controlling effect operations, such as the area shown in FIG. 10-11 (A) for holding data for effect control. Area 079SG190 is provided. The performance control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a performance control flag setting section 079SG191, a performance control timer setting section 079SG192, a performance control counter setting section 079SG193, and a performance control buffer setting section 079SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 079SG191 includes a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 079SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 079SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 079SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting section 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 079SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 079SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning prize designation command (the first starting opening winning prize designation command or the second starting opening winning prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (the Two commands (1 pending memory number notification command or 2nd pending memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are associated with the starting opening winning designation command and the pending storage number notification command. , storage areas (entries) for separately storing the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory are secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are determined later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" are It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when the process ends.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A when a starting winning is made to the first starting winning opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in Figure 10-11(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in Figure 10-11(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning determination process of the feature section 079SG executed in step S101 in FIG. 6 will be described based on FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079SGS101; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 079SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory count value which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 079SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 079SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 079SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 079SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 079SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 079SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 079SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning prize designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 079SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, the holding storage is stored in the effect control board 12. Settings for transmitting the number notification command are performed (step 079SGS113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and then the process of step 079SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS116), and then the starting opening is won. Finish the process. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 10-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the effect control process processing in this feature section 079SG. In the production control process processing, the production control CPU 120 executes the prefetch notice setting process (step S161), and then updates the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U, and Hold display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotating display) the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation process (step 079SGS163) and the fourth symbol display process (step 079SG164) that executes the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J, one of steps S170 to S177 is executed depending on the value of the production control process flag. Execute the process.

FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 079SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special symbol pending memory in the reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of start winning is set to "1-0" to "1-4". Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

Further, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A are stored for one buffer number each. Shift to the upper position (step 079SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is a third variable display result designation command or a fourth variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot B or probability variable jackpot C, a stop symbol other than "7" It is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is determined from among the chance numbers "334", "778", etc. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the performance control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Then, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), proceed to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y). executes a chance-up performance determination process (step 079SGS278), and determines whether or not to perform a chance-up performance in the latter half of the first ready-to-reach performance or the second half of the third reach-based performance.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-15, if the variable display result is a failure, it is decided to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 20%, and it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 80%. decide. Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 80%, and it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 20%. That is, in the variable reach display of the feature section 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the jackpot expectation level is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 and 10-32, only one performance pattern is provided as a performance mode of chance-up performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of performance patterns may be provided as the performance mode of the chance-up performance, and the expected degree of jackpot may be different depending on which performance pattern the chance-up performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this feature part 079SG, there is only one timing to start the chance up performance as shown in FIGS. 10-27 and 10-32, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of performance start timings may be provided, and the expected degree of jackpot may vary depending on from which performance start timing the chance-up performance is started.

Further, after determining whether to execute or not execute the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079SGS279). If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), the notification performance (big hit notification performance or miss A still image display effect for determining a performance pattern of a still image display effect that displays the still image displayed at the end of the second reach effect on the image display device 5 during a period until the start of the notification effect (notification effect). The determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-16(A), if the variable display result is a failure, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100%. If pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a jackpot, the still image display performance pattern is determined to be pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80% and pattern SG-2 at a rate of 20%. do.

As shown in FIG. 10-16(B), the still image display effect pattern SG-1 freezes the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. The still image display effect pattern SG-2 is a performance pattern that is displayed as a still image after the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 is displayed as a still image at the end of the second reach performance. , is a production pattern that changes the color of the still image.

In particular, pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot, so when the second reach effect is executed, the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the color of the still image changes.

In addition, if it is not the variation pattern of super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) ( Step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079SGS282; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach β3 (step 079SGS281; Y ), executes the operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during the execution of the fourth reach effect, and proceeds to step 079SGS283. .

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-17(A), if the variable display result is a failure, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect to pattern SS at a rate of 80%. -1 is determined, and pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-2 at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17(B), the operation promotion performance pattern SS-1 is a performance pattern in which an image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The effect pattern SS-2 is an effect pattern in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a larger size than the pattern SS-1.

In other words, the operation promotion performance in the feature section 079SG is performed when the image of the large size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion performance is executed in pattern SS-2). (in the case where the image of the push button 31B of normal size is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5) is higher than the case (in which case the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Since the variable display result has a high probability of becoming a jackpot (a jackpot notification effect is executed), the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed. This allows players to increase their interest in gaming.

In step 079SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute each effect such as the above-mentioned chance-up effect, still image display effect, operation promotion effect, etc., and the effect control pattern (process table) according to the effect pattern and variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 079SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 079SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In addition, in the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer every time the variable display performance process is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction times out. Determine whether or not. If the process timer after the subtraction has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer after the subtraction has timed out, the process data At the same time as the switching is performed, the next process timer is started, and the presentation device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

Next, the presentation mode of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in this feature section 079SG will be explained based on FIGS. 10-18 to 10-35.

First, regarding the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in Figures 10-18, 10-19, and 10-26 (A) to 10-26 (G), when the variable display starts, the image display In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, a moving image such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started at a normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progressing speed of V3. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R start playing BGM, sound effects, etc. according to the variable display at the normal playback speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb start to alternately light up (flash) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts blinking at a constant cycle. Ru. Hereinafter, flashing or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in this feature section 079SG means flashing or lighting the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d in synchronization. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

As shown in Figures 10-18, 10-19, and 10-26 (A) to 10-26 (C), when the timing of the development of the reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first half of the first reach effect is reached. The execution period begins, and a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A is started. As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first half execution period of the first reach performance begins, a video in which the friendly character A attacks the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 described above to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which friendly character A attacks enemy character A in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F) In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is a variable display of super reach α1, when the first half execution period of the first reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 10-18 and 10-26 (E) to 10-26 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, after a video of friendly character A's successful attack and enemy character A falling down is displayed as a jackpot notification effect, the decorative symbols stop at the jackpot combination and the jackpot game state is controlled. will be notified. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

During the jackpot notification performance, the video of the part where ally character A's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to Figure 10-26 (E)), and the subsequent enemy character The display of the moving image of the part where the robot collapses is executed at the advancing speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26(F)). Then, the video of the part where it is announced that the decorative symbols stop at the jackpot combination and are controlled to the jackpot game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Figure 10-26 (G) ).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of Super Reach α2 or Super Reach α3, when the first half execution period of the first reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-26 (D) , the attack of the ally character A is not successful, and the period shifts to the second half execution period of the first reach performance.

As shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-27(A) to 10-27(B), when the second half of the first reach performance is executed, the battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, in the second half execution period of the first reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 10-27 (B). . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 similarly to the effect video of the battle effect.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first reach performance execution period approaches, a video of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which the attack of friendly character A towards enemy character A is displayed in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α2, when the second half execution period of the first reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-27 (E) to 10-27 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a failure notification effect, after the attack of ally character A fails and is defeated by enemy character A, the decorative symbols stop at a failure combination and the variable display result is a failure. will be notified.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the video display is executed at the normal progress speed V1 in the part where the attack of ally character A fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a failure. Ru.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguished display of the fourth symbol (display of the lights out of both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb) ) is carried out.

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach α3, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-27 (D), during the second half execution period of the first reach effect, Character A's attack is successful and enemy character A is defeated. Then, the process shifts to the first half execution period of the second ready-to-reach performance.

As shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28 (A) to 10-28 (B), when moving to the execution period of the first half of the second reach effect, ally character A and enemy character B The battle performance progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the second reach performance first half execution period approaches, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28 (C), an image is The display of concentrated lines starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, and at the same time, the display of the moving image of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character B starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

Additionally, during the period in which friendly character A attacks enemy character B in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, while the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, the blinking cycle of the gaming effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-28(D), the number of concentrated lines as the effect production described above is gradually increased and displayed.

In other words, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the progress speed of the battle effect video decreases to V2, and the number of concentrated lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases and the game effect lamp 9 blinks violently. Therefore, by increasing the number of concentrated lines and blinking the game effect lamp 9, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the performance result of the battle performance (Which one will be executed, the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance). It is possible.

After the execution period of the second half of the second reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28 (E), it is displayed at the end of the battle effect as a still image display effect. The image that was displayed (in this feature section 079SG, the image immediately before the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F switches from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the rotation of the telop from left to right The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the proceeding speed V3 without change, and the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is carried out without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 changes according to the progress of the video of the battle effect. The cycle returns to the previous cycle when the speed decreased to V2.

Furthermore, if pattern SG-2 is determined as the performance pattern for the still image display performance, as shown in Figures 10-29(A) to 10-29(E), the battle performance will be used as the still image display performance. The colors of the last displayed image are reversed. After the still image display effect in which the color is reversed ends, a jackpot notification effect is displayed stating that ally character A's attack hits enemy character B, and after enemy character B falls down, the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. be notified. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop at a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-29 (F), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

As shown in Figure 10-20, the jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2 is that the video in which the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1. However, the moving image of the enemy character B falling down is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, a moving image in which the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination after the enemy character B falls down is displayed at the progressing speed V1. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop at a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect will not be reversed and the still image display effect will be changed to Figure 10-30 (A). ) ~ As shown in Figure 10-30 (D), there is a case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as described above, and a case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as shown in Figures 10-30 (F) ~ Figure 10-30 (H). There are times when a performance is performed.

The jackpot notification performance when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SG-1 is the same as the jackpot notification performance when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in Figure 10-20. In this example, a moving image in which the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B is displayed at a advancing speed of V1, but a moving image in which enemy character B falls down is displayed at advancing speed V2. Then, after the enemy character B falls down, the progress speed is displayed at V1. During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(E), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

Also, as a failure notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the attack of ally character A does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, the attack of enemy character B hits ally character A. After the ally character A falls down due to a hit, the decorative symbols stop at a wrong combination and it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

As the failure notification effect, as shown in FIG. 10-21, a moving image of ally character A's attack until it is defeated by enemy character B without hitting is displayed at a progress speed of V1. During the failure notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (I), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are extinguished) ) is carried out.

Next, regarding the variable display of super reach β1 to β3 shown in Figures 10-22, 10-23, and 10-31 (A) to 10-31 (H), when the variable display starts, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, a moving image such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started at a normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progressing speed of V3. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R start playing BGM, sound effects, etc. according to the variable display at the normal playback speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb start to alternately light up (flash) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts blinking at a constant cycle. Ru.

As shown in Figures 10-22, 10-23, and 10-31 (A) to 10-31 (C), when the timing of the development of the reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first half of the third reach effect is reached. The execution period begins, and a battle performance between ally character B and enemy character A is started. As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first half execution period of the third reach performance begins, a video of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 described above to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which the attack of ally character B toward enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is a variable display of super reach β1, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 10-22 and 10-31 (E) to 10-31 (G). Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, a moving image of friendly character B's successful attack and enemy character A falling down is displayed, and then it is announced that the jackpot game state will be controlled. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

During the jackpot notification performance, the video of the part where ally character B's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to Figure 10-30 (E)), and the subsequent enemy character The display of the moving image of the part where the robot collapses is executed at the advancing speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30(F)). Then, the video of the part where it is announced that the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination and are controlled to the jackpot game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Figure 10-30 (G) ).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β2 or Super Reach β3, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-31 (D) , the attack of ally character B is not successful, and the execution period shifts to the second half of the third reach effect.

As shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-32 (A) to 10-32 (B), when the second half of the third reach performance begins, the battle performance between ally character B and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, in the second half execution period of the third reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 10-32 (B). . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 similarly to the effect video of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed with priority over the effect animation of the chance-up effect, while the effect animation of the chance-up effect is displayed with the decorative pattern (the image shown in FIG. 10-32(B) It is displayed with priority over "7" displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display device 5. For this reason, in this feature section 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up performance, the player can recognize that the variable display is in progress by visually recognizing the small symbols, and also display the performance video of the chance-up performance. By displaying the symbols with priority over the symbols, it is possible to reliably secure an area on the image display device 5 for displaying the performance animation of the chance-up performance.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the performance video of the chance-up performance is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design is displayed with priority over the performance video of the chance-up performance. may also be displayed with priority. By doing this, the player can easily recognize from which decorative symbol combination the reach effect that is currently being executed has developed, thereby improving the game's interest.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first reach performance execution period approaches, a video of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which the attack of ally character B toward enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β2, when the second half execution period of the third reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-32 (E) to 10-32 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a failure notification effect, after the attack of friendly character B fails and is defeated by enemy character A, it is reported that the variable display result is a failure.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the video display is executed at the normal progress speed V1 in the part where ally character B's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a failure. Ru.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are extinguished) ) is carried out.

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach β3, as shown in Figures 10-24, 10-25, and 10-32 (D), during the second half execution period of the third reach performance, Character B's attack is successful and enemy character A is defeated. Then, the process moves to the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach performance.

As shown in Figures 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33 (A) to 10-33 (B), when moving to the execution period of the first half of the 4th reach effect, ally character AB and enemy character B The battle performance progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the fourth reach performance first half execution period approaches, the image display device 5 changes as shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33 (C). In the first display area 079SG005F, display of a moving image in which ally character B attacks enemy character B is started. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when friendly character B attacks enemy character B in slow motion (during the period when the progress speed of the battle production video in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, while the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, the blinking cycle of the gaming effect lamp 9 becomes shorter (the blinking cycle becomes shorter). faster).

In other words, in the second half execution period of the fourth reach performance, the progress speed of the video of the battle performance decreases to V2, and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 becomes more intense. It is possible to effectively draw a player's attention to the performance result (Which of the jackpot notification performance and the loss notification performance is executed).

Then, as the second half of the fourth ready-to-reach performance progresses, the operation promotion performance is executed. When the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-1, the push button 31B is displayed at the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 together with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba that imitates the shape of the push button 31B. The display of the meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period and the effect image 079SG005E are started, and the updated display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged updated display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the periphery of the image display device 5 are started. As mentioned above, the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on image data 2 (see Figure 10-3), so they are displayed at a constant rate regardless of the progress speed of the battle effect. Displayed as a video of progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-33(D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the period for accepting operation of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by an updated display of the meter 079SG005M, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged. Update display progresses. Furthermore, since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player will be able to visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and when the operation promotion effect is not executed. The visibility of the battle performance is reduced. Since the execution period of the operation promotion performance is included in the second half of the fourth reach performance, the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion performance.

As shown in Figures 10-33 (D) and 10-33 (E), the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion performance, but the end timing of the operation promotion performance (push At the timing (timing when button 31B operation reception ends), the scene does not progress to the point where it is known whether or not the attack of friendly character B will hit enemy character B. In other words, the jackpot notification effect or the failure notification effect will not start. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(A) to 10-34(E), when the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-2, the first display on the image display device 5 In the center of the area 079SG005F, a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B starts to be displayed as an operation promotion image imitating the shape of the push button 31B, together with an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb whose size is larger than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. As mentioned above, the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on image data 2 (see Figure 10-3), so they are displayed at a constant rate regardless of the progress speed of the battle effect. Displayed as a video of progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-34 (D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the period for accepting operation of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by an updated display of the meter 079SG005M, and at the same time, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb Most of the battle production images are hidden. Note that the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is an image having a larger size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and has a transmittance of 0%, as described above. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation promotion performance is included in the second half of the fourth reach performance, the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion performance.

As shown in Figures 10-34 (D) and 10-34 (E), the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion performance, but the end timing of the operation promotion performance (push At the timing (timing when button 31B operation reception ends), the scene does not progress to the point where it is known whether or not the attack of friendly character B will hit enemy character B. In other words, the jackpot notification effect or the failure notification effect will not start. It has become.

Then, if the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or if the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is If the game ends), the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed from the timing when these players operate the push button 31B or from the timing when the operation promotion performance ends.

As the jackpot notification performance after the operation promotion performance, as shown in Figures 10-24 and 10-35 (A) to 10-35 (C), a video of friendly character B's attack hitting enemy character B is shown. Although the animation is displayed at the advancing speed V1, the moving image of the enemy character B falling is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (D), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

Also, as a failure notification performance after the operation promotion performance, as shown in Figures 10-25 and 10-35 (E) to 10-35 (G), the attack of friendly character B hits enemy character B. First, on the contrary, after the enemy character B's attack hits the ally character B and the ally character B falls down, it is reported that the jackpot game state will not be controlled. In particular, when the failure notification effect is executed, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-25, as the failure notification performance, a moving image is displayed at a progressing speed V1 until the attack of the ally character B does not hit and the decoration pattern stops with a combination of failures. During the failure notification performance, the rotation of the pending display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguished display of the fourth symbol (display of the lights out of both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb) ) is carried out.

In addition, Figure 10-26 (H), Figure 10-27 (H), Figure 10-29 (F), Figure 10-30 (E), Figure 10-30 (I), Figure 10-31 (H), As shown in FIG. 10-32 (H), FIG. 10-35 (D), and FIG. Although the present invention is not limited to this, at the end timing of the variable display, the display of the telop display area 079SG005T itself on the image display device 5 is illustrated. may be performed, but the display of the telop (message) itself in the telop display area 079SG005T may not be performed.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, in the variable display of super reach α3 and super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened in a slow motion period other than immediately before the notification performance. Further, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened also during a part of the period (non-slow motion period) in which the display of the ready-to-win effect animation is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance is During the first half execution period, the videos of each reach performance are displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed of V1, and the second half of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance is displayed. During the partial execution period, the moving images of each reach effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V2. For this reason, while the video of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2, the degree of emotional empathy of the player towards the ally character displayed during the reach effect is increased, and jackpot notification is announced. Since it is possible to increase expectations for the execution of the performance, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. On the other hand, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance, BGM and performance sounds from speakers 8L and 8R are Since the output is still output at the normal playback speed of V4, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the sound output device in this feature section 079SG includes a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit 079SG134, and speakers 8L and 8R, so it is easy to reproduce the variable display including when performing a reach effect, when playing a jackpot game, etc. Performance sounds such as high-quality BGM (songs) and sound effects can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R at appropriate volumes, making it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, the game effect Since the lamp 9 flashes at a shorter period than usual, the performance effect can be improved by flashing the game effect lamp 9 at a shorter period during the period when the progress speed of the performance video is V2.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a form is exemplified in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing period of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second ready-to-win performance or the fourth ready-to-win performance. By doing so, the player can recognize from the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification effect will be executed soon, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given in which the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing from the first ready-to-win effect to the fourth ready-to-win effect.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect, the progress of the effect video of the reach effect. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, the rotational speed of the hold display and the moving speed of the caption are both constant at V3, and the playback speed of the performance sound output from speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Note that in this feature section 079SG, an example is given in which the rotation speed of the hold display and the moving display speed of the caption displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are both V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. The rotational speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, so each reach effect During execution, the player can more easily recognize the ready-to-reach effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, during periods other than during the reach effect, the rotating display of the pending display is rotated at rotation speed V3 in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U. This is executed, and in the telop display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is executed at the moving speed V3. In other words, the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the telop are executed at the same speed as during the reach effect, so that the player can It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-2(C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end the display, and at the same time the telop display area 079SG005T ends. Since it is displayed again at the left end of 079SG005T and moved again from the left to the right, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

Note that in this feature section 079SG, the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T. There may be a timing when a part of the displayed telop becomes invisible to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the display of the effect animation of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, and the image By executing the effect presentation of displaying concentrated lines on the display device 5, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect during the latter half execution period of the second ready-to-reach presentation, thereby improving the interest in the game. In particular, in this feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28(C) and 10-28(D), the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as the battle performance progresses, so the display of concentrated lines increases. By increasing the number, the player can more easily recognize that the second ready-to-win performance is finished and the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the effect production according to the present invention is exemplified as a display of concentrated lines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The output of a specific sound effect from 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as effect effects, and the second reach effect ( As the battle performance) progresses, the effect level of the effect performance is increased one after another (for example, increasing the range of motion of the movable body 32, increasing the volume of a specific sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, The vibration of the controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be vibrated, etc.).

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (G), and Figure 10-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect. When the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden and the first display area 079SG005F is displayed. Since the image of the jackpot notification performance is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the visibility of the jackpot notification performance in the second display area 079SG005Sa is further increased, and the player is made aware that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. It's easy to do.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, when executing the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. In a state where the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the first In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed overlappingly with the first pending storage display area 079SG005D, the second pending storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T).

At this time, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made transparent or displayed in a reduced size, or the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U are displayed in a reduced size. The visibility of the jackpot notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the pending displays displayed in the pending display area.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F. As shown in FIG. 10-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the rotation display of the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and Since the moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, it is possible that a suspended display is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect, or that the telop is being displayed moving. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the pending display, and by stopping the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the telop, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the pending display and the display of the telop. .

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 10-16 and 10-29(A) to 10-29(B), when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being performed by inverting the color of the still image.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as a mode for changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as a still image display effect, a mode in which the color of the still image is inverted has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Examples of ways to change the color of a still image include, but are not limited to, changing the color of a still image to black and white, changing only part of the color of a still image, and adding new colors to a still image. It may be added.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2, Since the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the colors of the fourth symbol displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not reversed, the player can see what is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. By comparing the hold display, telop, fourth symbol, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

In addition, in each variable display of the super reach in this feature part 079SG, there is a pattern in which the first reach effect or the third reach effect is executed and then the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect is executed, and a pattern in which the first reach effect or the third reach effect is executed. There is a pattern in which the variable display ends after the execution of the performance, transitioning to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance, so the display of the reach performance video progresses during the first reach performance or third reach performance. Whether or not to move to the second reach performance or fourth reach performance after being executed at speed V2, and display of the performance video of the reach performance during the second reach performance or third reach performance are executed at progress speed V2 Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the player is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled after the game is played, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-19, 10-20, 10-21, 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the first reach performance and the third reach performance, the The production in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character during the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance and the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance are performed at the same time. Since it is executed at speed V1, the progress speed when transitioning from the first half execution period of the first reach performance to the second half execution period of the first reach performance or from the first half execution period of the third reach performance to the second half execution period of the third reach performance is different from the progress speed of the performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character during the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance, thereby excessively increasing the expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. You can prevent this from happening. Furthermore, Figure 10-18, Figure 10-20, Figure 10-22, Figure 10-24, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) ~ Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure As shown in 10-35(C), in the jackpot notification performance of this feature section 079SG, while displaying a video when an enemy character collapses due to a hit by an attack of an ally character is executed at a progress speed of V2, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25, Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10-30 (H ), as shown in Figures 10-32 (E) to 10-32 (G), and Figures 10-35 (D) to 10-35 (F), in the failure notification effect, a video is displayed when an ally character falls down. is displayed at the progress speed V1, so when the loss notification effect is executed, the display of the effect video of the loss notification effect is not executed at the progress speed V2, which may cause player dissatisfaction. It is also possible to prevent this from becoming excessively high, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the variable display result of super reach is a failure notification effect is executed, the display of the effect animation of the failure notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the variable display of the super reach, the presentation animation of the loss notification presentation may be displayed at a progress speed V2 that is slower than V1. By doing this, it is possible to create variations in the performance of the failure notification performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which the progress speed V1 of the performance video during the jackpot notification performance is the third speed in the present invention, and the progression speed V2 of the performance video during the jackpot notification performance is the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-24 and 10-25, the operation promotion effect is executed when the video of the reach effect is being displayed at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach effect. Therefore, the performance effect of the fourth reach performance can be enhanced by the operation promotion performance.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the display of the effect video of the fourth reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 while the operation promotion effect is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. During execution of the operation promotion performance, the display of the performance video of the fourth ready-to-reach performance may be performed at the progress speed V1. Furthermore, it is possible to execute a suggestion performance that suggests that the operation promotion performance will be executed before the operation promotion performance is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestion performance, the performance video of the fourth reach performance is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be executed.

In addition, as an operation promotion effect of the feature section 079SG, in addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M that notifies the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is now displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. While these operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or operation promotion image 079SG005Bb and meter 079SG005M are displayed, the display of the fourth reach effect animation at the progress speed V2 is continued, but the notification effect does not progress. . Furthermore, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. With this, the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect is executed. Therefore, the notification effect is not executed at a timing before the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends (until the operation promotion effect ends), so if the push button is not operated by the player, the notification effect is It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, although the embodiment in which the detection means in the present invention is the push button 31B is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means may be a stick controller 31A or the like other than the push button 31B. In addition to the operation means described above, sensors capable of detecting the player's actions such as a motion sensor or a touch sensor may be used.

Also, Figure 10-18, Figure 10-20, Figure 10-22, Figure 10-24, Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) to Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) to Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) to Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) to Figure 10-35 (C ), in the jackpot notification performance in this feature section 079SG, the video of the part where the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the video of the part where the enemy character collapses is shown at the progress speed V1. Displayed at speed V2. In contrast, Figures 10-19, 10-21, 10-23, 10-25, 10-27(E) to 10-27(G), 10-30(E) to 10- 30(G), FIG. 10-32(E) to FIG. 10-32(G), and FIG. 10-35(D) to FIG. The moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1, and is never displayed at the advancing speed V2. In other words, when a jackpot notification performance is executed, a part of the performance video of the jackpot notification performance is displayed at the progress speed V2, thereby giving the player the impression that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. can.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot in the present invention, a still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (a still image display effect in which colors are reversed). Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted as a still image display effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is used as a special effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is , effects other than the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow color, etc.) may be possible.

In addition, the operation promotion effect of this feature part 079SG is pattern SS-1 in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and a pattern SS-1 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. This can be executed in any of the performance patterns including pattern SS-2 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, is displayed as the operation promotion image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be viewed through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while in pattern SS-2 When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, so the operation promotion effect is more difficult than when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. The visibility of the battle performance of 4 reach performance is low. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-17, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot is the same as when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the variable display result is lower than the rate of hitting a jackpot, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2 is used to perform the operation promotion performance, thereby improving the interest in the game. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33 (C) to 10-33 (E), when displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba as an operation promotion effect, the operation promotion image While displaying 079SG005Ba, the display of the animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb changes the progress speed V2 (slow motion ), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion performance is pattern SS. -2, in addition to displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, by displaying a dedicated background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5, the production video (battle It is also possible to make the performance (direction) completely invisible. In addition, during the period when the 4th reach performance video (battle performance) is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to the operation promotion performance pattern SS-2, the 4th reach performance video (battle performance) The display may be performed at the progress speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in this feature section 079SG, as super reach effects, a second reach effect can be executed after the first reach effect, and a fourth reach effect can be executed after the third reach effect. Furthermore, as the variable display of super reach, there is a variable display of super reach α1 that notifies the jackpot after the first half execution period of the first reach effect, and a variable display of super reach β1 that notifies the jackpot after the first half execution period of the third reach effect. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the second half execution period of the first reach performance after the first half execution period of the first reach performance and informs of the failure, and the second half of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance Variable display of super reach β2 that executes a partial execution period and informs of failure, variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the second reach effect after the first reach effect exchange partial execution period, third reach effect exchange partial execution period It is possible to perform a variable display of Super Reach α3 that transitions to the 4th Reach performance after , and as shown in Figures 10-18 to 10-25, from the execution period of the first half of the 1st Reach performance to the latter half of the 1st Reach performance. When transitioning to the execution period, When transitioning from the first half of the first reach performance to the first half of the second reach performance, When transitioning from the first half of the third reach performance to the second half of the third reach performance , when transitioning from the second half execution period of the third reach performance to the first half execution period of the fourth reach performance, the performance video of each reach performance is executed at the progress speed V2, and from the first half execution period of the first reach performance to the first half execution period. When transitioning to the execution period of the second half of the reach performance, when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance to the execution period of the first half of the second reach performance, from the execution period of the first half of the third reach performance to the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance When transitioning from the second half execution period of the third reach performance to the first half execution period of the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods. Therefore, when transitioning from the first half part execution period of the first reach performance to the second half execution period of the first reach performance, when transitioning from the second half execution period of the first reach performance to the first half execution period of the second reach performance, the third reach performance When transitioning from the execution period of the first half of the performance to the second half of the third reach performance, and when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the fourth reach performance, the player is given a sense of discomfort. You can prevent it from getting stowed away. Furthermore, by displaying the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect at the progress speed V2, it is possible to easily recognize the branching of the ready-to-win effect drawn by the player.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach of this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which two reach effects can be executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display of super reach, three or more reach effects can be executed. It may be possible to perform a reach effect, or it may be possible to perform only one reach effect.

Although the characteristic portion 079SG of the present invention has been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature section 079SG, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are provided as reach effects for super reach, and in all of these reach effects, a part of the effect video of the reach effect is provided. Although a mode in which the display is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion) has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. A pattern in which the effect video is always displayed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the effect video is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Furthermore, the content of the effect may be different between a ready-to-win effect in which a part of the effect video is displayed at the progress speed V2 and a ready-to-reach effect in which the display of the effect video is not performed at the progress speed V2. By doing this, it is possible to create variations in the reach performance of the super reach, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is always played back at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether or not the presentation video is being displayed at the progress speed V2. Although the output format is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example 079SG-1, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are shown. In the first half of the execution period of the second half of each reach performance, the playback speed V4 is set from speakers 8L and 8R as in the first half execution period of each reach performance of 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance. While the production sound is output in V4, in the second half (slow motion period) of the execution period of the second half of each reach performance of the 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance, The effect sound may be output at a different playback speed (for example, playback speed V5 slower than V4). By doing this, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance sound for the reach performance by varying the playback speed of the performance sound while the display of the performance video for the reach performance is being executed at the progress speed V2. You can improve your interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the reach effect by displaying the effect image 079SG005E, displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, etc. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, after the reach effect ends, , the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-36(A) to 10-36(D), when the second reach effect is being executed, when the second reach effect is finished together with the still image display effect, As part of the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), the results are shown in FIGS. 10-36(E) and 10-36(F). As such, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot game state will be controlled as a jackpot notification performance, or that the jackpot game state will not be controlled as a loss notification performance.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-37(A) to 10-37(D), when the fourth reach effect is being executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player presses the push button 31B. When the operation promotion effect ends without operating the button 31B, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the second display. The image is enlarged and displayed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), the results are shown in FIGS. 10-37(E) and 10-37(F). As such, it is sufficient to notify that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state as a jackpot notification performance, or that it will not be controlled to a jackpot gaming state as a loss notification performance.

Note that the effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. 10-3(B), and the drawing range is expanded as an image based on the image data 2. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F without reducing the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

In this way, in this modified example 079SG-2, while the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, After the end of the reach effect or the end of the fourth reach effect, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the effect image 079SG005Ea as part of the notification effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is reduced. does not change, so by changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the timing of the notification effect, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb changes. By not changing, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the pending display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth symbol, etc.

Furthermore, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image that is drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. The visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by being enlarged toward the display area 079SG005Sb. Only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F can be accurately reduced, and the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by being executed toward the area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be made difficult to change.

In addition, although this modified example 079SG-2 exemplifies a form in which the operation promotion performance is executed during the fourth reach performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion performance is part of the notification performance. It may be executed as a part.

In addition, when performing the operation promotion effect as a part of the notification effect, as shown in FIGS. 10-38(A) to 10-38(F) as a modified example 079SG-3, it is similar to the modified example 079SG-2. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 10-38(D). do.

Note that by displaying these operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG. 10-2(A), it is possible to avoid a decrease in visibility due to effect image 079SG005Ea.

Thereafter, the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the player operating the push button 31B, or the operation promotion performance is completed without the player operating the push button 31B, or the jackpot gaming state It is reported that the system is not controlled.

As described above, in this modified example 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced due to the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data are Since the visibility of the push button 31B does not decrease, the operation promotion effect can be made more prominent than the fourth ready-to-reach effect, and the player can be effectively urged to operate the push button 31B.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the variable display result is always a jackpot, but the present invention The invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example No. 079SG-4, if the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always It may be possible to have a variable probability jackpot (or even a variable probability jackpot A that is most advantageous to the player). Furthermore, as a performance pattern when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state again after the loss notification performance is executed once. It may also be possible to perform a revival effect that notifies the user of the situation. In addition, in the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the jackpot type will be a variable jackpot or a non-probable variable jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot). A case where the game is controlled to a jackpot game state and a case where the game is controlled to a jackpot game state with a variable probability jackpot may be provided. By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect will be executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. .

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, a message indicating the gaming status is displayed as an example of the telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this. The displayed telop may include a message indicating whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to a jackpot game state, the title of the reach effect being executed, etc. good.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, a mode is exemplified in which a telop can be displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T according to the state of the performance being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T The telops displayed are those that can identify the gaming status, the expectation level that the variable display result will be a jackpot in the variable display being executed (jackpot expectation level), the explanation of the performance being executed (especially the reach performance), and the reach performance. It may also be a preview performance that can be executed from a timing earlier than the above.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, during the period when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the operation promotion effect (operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion The display of image 079SG005Bb) has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is executed after the moving image of the reach effect returns from the progress speed V2 to the progress speed V1. Good too.

Furthermore, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, an example is given in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed on the image display device 5 as the operation promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect includes not only simply displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, but also displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. As a pre-display effect, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of each push button 31B are displayed overlappingly, thereby creating an operation promotion image. An effect may be performed in which 079SG005Ba or operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed.

In addition, when performing the effect in which the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5 as a precursor effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5. The moving display speed may be reduced as the image approaches the center of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation promotion effect will be executed, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, when displaying the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although a mode is illustrated in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (emission colors) of the game effect lamp 9 is different from when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. You can. For example, when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in multiple colors, while the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. When playing, the game effect lamp 9 may be able to emit light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the moving image of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the game interest from decreasing due to the emitted light color of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, when displaying the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although a mode is illustrated in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the moving image of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be made longer. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the display of the moving image of the reach effect and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-26, 10-29, 10-30, 10-31, and 10-35, the performance mode of the jackpot notification performance includes the end of the reach performance. Later, an example is shown in which the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination that indicates a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination that indicates a jackpot. The timing may be during the reach performance.

Furthermore, the present invention provides a gaming machine in which a player can select at least part of the effect sounds such as BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. May be applied to By doing this, if the player has set the output of the effect sound that matches his/her preference, when the video of each reach effect is being displayed at the progress speed V1, the speaker 8L , the effect sound output from 8R remains unchanged and is played back at the playback speed V4, so even though the player himself has selected the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the effect sound is played back at the playback speed V4. It is also possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to slow playback.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as an end suggestion performance in the present invention, it is possible to execute a performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance, and the performance Although we have exemplified a form in which the variable display result always fails when executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. After the effect in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is temporarily switched to the display of the normal background image before the reach effect, and then the variable display result shows that the jackpot is achieved. (For example, a case where a revival effect is performed) may be provided.

In addition, when performing the resurrection effect in this way, the game effect lamp 9 is lit and flashed before the animation of the resurrection effect is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the resurrection effect is displayed to the player. It may be made to recognize that it will be executed. Further, as a presentation mode of the resurrection presentation, for example, the ally character may attack the enemy character again and defeat the enemy character. In particular, when performing a resurrection effect, a part of the video of the resurrection effect (for example, a video of a scene where an enemy character collapses) is displayed at a progress speed of V2 to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. Good too.

Further, although a plurality of characteristic parts and modifications are disclosed in this specification, the gaming machine of the present invention can be implemented by combining two or more of these plurality of characteristic parts and modifications. You may.

For example, the pachinko game machine 1 of the feature section 079SG may be a pachinko game machine in which the jackpot probability can be changed by changing setting values as shown in FIGS. 1 to 9. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display results are out of order, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to a high setting value (for example, 6) that is advantageous to the player. is set, even if the variable display results are off in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in pachinko game machine 1. good. By doing this, the fact that the variable display result is off in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 can be used as a suggestion that a high setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, in the variable display of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach β1, it is possible to suppress the decrease in player's interest due to the variable display result being wrong, and to draw the attention of the players to the fact that the variable display result is wrong. It becomes possible.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game machine that plays a predetermined game is defined as a game machine that plays at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can perform variable display (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1), and has sound output means that can output performance sounds (for example, speakers 8L, 8R and audio The control board 13 includes a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, an amplification circuit 079SG134), a display area that can display a moving image and an image, and displays information related to the progress of the game in the display area. Display images (for example, first interface image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J) of game-related information (for example, the number of reserved special symbols, the number of reserved special symbols, and small symbols whose display area is smaller than the decorative symbols) ), image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information. a memorizable storage means (for example, CGROM 205);
A plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area shown in FIG. 14-5) etc.) and is capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers (for example, display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210); A performance execution means (for example, a performance) capable of executing a predetermined performance (for example, a reach performance) that displays a performance video of a character on a display means and outputs a performance sound from the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. A control CPU 120), and the effect execution means is capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 14-17). during the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is at a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25). As such, during the execution period of the first half of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1. In a second period of the predetermined performance that is subsequent to the first period, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means ( For example, as shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, the video of each reach effect is displayed during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (a portion displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V2), the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect is the same in both the first period and the second period. (For example, as shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance) During the first half execution period and the second half execution period, the storage means stores at least some of the The display position of the specific image in the display area is changed from a first position (for example, the center of the display area of the image display device 5 in the case of the characteristic part 006SG) to a second position different from the first position (for example, the characteristic part 006SG, it is possible to store display position displacement information for displacing the display area of the image display device 5 to an upper position or a lower position (for example, the CGROM 205 has a portion in which data for a displacement image is stored). ), the image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image placed in the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, in FIG. 14-23 As shown in , a displacement target image is created by superimposing the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image is created for the displacement target image. By applying , the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance. (a portion that creates a moved image), the effect executing means is configured to perform a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the characteristic portion 006SG) that displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display. ), and the display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area than in the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26). As shown, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are portions (gaming machines) drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority.

According to such a configuration, the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, a displacement specific image in which at least a part of a specific image displayed in a predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in a specific effect. A specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data than when image data of a specific image is exclusively stored. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from decreasing when a specific performance is executed.

In other words, by not changing the speed of the performance sound that corresponds to a predetermined performance, it is possible to create a gaming machine that is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is also possible to execute a specific performance with a small amount of data. It is possible to prevent the visibility of a display image of game-related information from decreasing when a specific performance is executed. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to players when installed in a gaming parlor, and can execute a specific performance using a small amount of data without reducing the visibility of the display image of game-related information. .

In addition, we have developed a gaming machine that is less likely to give players a sense of discomfort in the performance, can execute a specific performance with a small amount of data, and can prevent the visibility of the display image of game-related information from decreasing. As an example of the form, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can perform variable display has a display area that can display an image, and game-related information regarding the progress of the game is displayed in the display area. (For example, display image (for example, first interface image 006SG005I or second interface image 006SG005J) of the first special figure pending memory number, second special figure pending memory number, small pattern whose display area is smaller than the decorative pattern) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information. A storage means (for example, CGROM 205), and a plurality of display layers (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. 14-5, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc.), and is capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers (for example, a display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210), and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display process shown in FIGS. 14-17). and, the storage means is configured to change the display position of at least some of the specific images in the display area from a first position (for example, in the case of characteristic part 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5). It is possible to store display position displacement information for displacing the display to a second position different from the first position (for example, in the case of the characteristic part 006SG, a position above or below the display area of the image display device 5). , the CGROM 205 is a portion in which data of a displacement image is stored), and the image processing means displaces the specific image placed in the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information. It is possible to generate a displacement specific image (for example, as shown in Figure 14-23, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to determine the displacement target). By creating an image and applying the displacement image to the displacement target image, the images of the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R are moved upward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance. (a part that creates an image in which the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward), the effect execution means is configured to move the image of the middle area 006SG005C downward while displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG) to be displayed in the display area, and the display image of the game-related information is displayed with priority in the display area over the specific display layer. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority.) (part) including gaming machines. Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 11 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 11(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 11(B) shows a configuration example of the first special symbol display result determination table used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. In addition, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 11(A).

As shown in FIG. 11(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the set value of the second variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 11(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 12, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the previous setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, when the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value within the range of the common numerical value range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are six from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 13, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S90174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S90175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 006SG in embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characteristic part 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be explained.

The gaming machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can perform variable display,
It has a display area that can display images, and the display area contains game-related information regarding the progress of the game (for example, the number of reserved special symbols, the number of reserved special symbols, and the small display area that is smaller than the decorative symbols). a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a pattern);
a storage means (for example, CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
A plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area shown in FIG. 14-5) etc.), and is capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers (for example, display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210);
an effect execution means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 14-17);
Equipped with
The storage means changes the display position of at least some of the specific images in the display area from a first position (for example, in the case of characteristic part 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. can store display position displacement information for displacing to a different second position (for example, in the case of the characteristic part 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, the CGROM 205 can store display position displacement information (the part where image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image placed in the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23). A displacement target image is created by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance. the part that creates the image),
The effect executing means is configured to display a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG, a reach suggestion in the modified example 006SG-1) that displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display. performance, revival performance in modification example 006SG-2, look-ahead preview performance in modification example 006SG-3, promotion performance in modification example 006SG-5, temporary stop suggestion performance and temporary stop notification performance in modification example 006SG-6). be,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display position of the specific image can be changed from the first position to the first position by simply using the image data for displaying the specific image in the display area and the display position displacement information for displacing the display position of the specific image. Since the specific effect can be executed by displacing the image to two positions, the amount of data stored in the storage means for executing the specific effect can be reduced compared to the case where the specific effect is executed using dedicated image data. .

The gaming machine of form A2 is the gaming machine described in form A1,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer where the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface Image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J are parts drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a specific effect is executed, the display position of the game-related information together with at least a part of the specific image is not displaced, so that the game-related information is difficult for the player to see when the specific effect is executed. You can prevent this from happening.

The gaming machine of form A3 is the gaming machine described in form A2,
At least some of the game-related information is displayed in an area that overlaps with the displacement specific image (for example, the second interface image 006SG005J is the image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion presentation). duplicate parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position and becomes the displaced specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed overlapping with the displaced specific image, so the player may feel that something is wrong. You can recognize game-related information without any problems.

The gaming machine of form A4 is the gaming machine according to form A2,
At least some of the game-related information is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area during the development suggestion presentation). (a portion displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with each image of area 006SG005R),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position and becomes a displacement specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed so as not to overlap with the displacement specific image, so the player can accurately can recognize game-related information.

The gaming machine of form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A2 to A4,
Comprising gaming identification information variable display execution means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 3) capable of variably displaying the gaming identification information (for example, special symbols). ,
The performance execution means is
In a first area within the display area, it is possible to variably display the performance identification information in accordance with the variable display of the gaming identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, the image display device 5 (a portion in the center of the display area where variable display of decorative designs can be performed in accordance with the variable display of special designs);
In a second area that is different from the first area in the display area and is smaller than the first area, it is possible to variably display the reduced identification information in accordance with the variable display of the gaming identification information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, a portion where small symbols can be displayed variably in accordance with the variable display of special symbols),
The display image of the performance identification information is arranged in the specific display layer, and changes from a first visibility state to a second visibility state that is less visible to the player than the first visibility state according to execution of the specific performance. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-21 and 14-23, the decorative pattern is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion effect is executed, the decorative pattern is displayed on the image display device 5. (the part where visibility decreases by moving upward or downward from the center of the display area),
The display image of the reduced identification information is arranged in the special display layer, and the visibility state does not change from the first visibility state according to the execution of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-21 and 14-23). As shown, the small designs are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative designs, they do not move from the top right of the display area of the image display device 5 when performing the development suggestion effect, so the visibility is not reduced. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visual recognition state of the performance identification information changes from the first visual recognition state to the second visual recognition state by executing a specific performance, so that the performance effect of the specific performance can be improved, and the performance can be reduced by executing the specific performance. Since the visible state of the identification information does not change from the first visible state, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the reduced identification information even during execution of a specific performance.

The gaming machine of form A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A5,
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, the upper area 006SG005T shown in FIG. 14-31) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, the lower area shown in FIG. 14-31). 006SG005B),
The performance execution means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(C), the specific image is displayed in the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B (a portion where a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the area), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displacement specific image (for example, As shown in 14-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),
When displacing the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area, the first specific display area and the second specific display area are moved at the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area. 2 Displaying an effect image (for example, cut effect image 006SG005S shown in FIG. 14-31) different from the image displayed in the specific display area;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to more effectively make the player recognize the displacement of the specific image to the second position as a specific effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A7 is the gaming machine described in form A6,
The effect execution means is capable of displacing the first specific display area in a first direction as a displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific effect; The display area can be displaced in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part that moves the upper region 006SG005T upward and a lower region 006SG005B downward, as shown in FIG. 14-31(E)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the displacement of the specific image to the second position as the specific effect is the displacement of the first specific display area in the first direction and the second specific display area in the second direction opposite to the first direction. By executing this as a displacement in the direction, the performance effect of the specific performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form A8 is the gaming machine described in form A6 or form A7,
The amount of displacement of the first specific display area and the amount of displacement of the second specific display area in the specific effect are different (for example, as shown in modification 006SG-3, an upper area 006SG005T and a lower area 006SG005B as a pre-read preview effect) When the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions, the amount of movement (displacement) is different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of a specific performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A6 to A8,
The effect image is arranged in a special display layer where the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-32, the cut effect image 006SG005S is (portions drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area as images with higher display priority than designs and background images),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the display position of a specific image changes as a specific effect, the display position of the effect image does not change, so the displacement of the display position of the specific image can be made more noticeable by comparing these specific images and the effect image. This allows the production effect of a specific production to be further improved.

The gaming machine of form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A6 to A9,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
The effect execution means can display the effect image in a plurality of display modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-30, a portion where the crack effect image 006SG005H can be displayed in two colors, blue and red; As shown in Figure 14-33, the part where the cutting effect image 006SG005S can be displayed in three colors of blue, green, and red),
The rate at which the effect image is controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the display mode in which the effect image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-30, in which color the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed. (as shown in FIG. 14-33, the part where the jackpot expectation differs depending on which color the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the effect image displayed during the specific performance, the performance effect of the specific performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A10,
The specific performance is a performance in which the specific image changes in stages (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the development suggestion performance of the characteristic part 006SG, it is displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R. As shown in Figure 14-27, in the revival performance of modified example 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside gradually expands and the amount of movement of the image gradually increases. As shown in Figure 14-35, where the amount of movement of the fragments that make up the decorative pattern gradually increases, the distortion of the decorative pattern and the background image gradually increases in the promotion performance of modification 006SG-5. going part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of the specific performance can be improved by changing the specific image in stages.

The gaming machine of form A12 is the gaming machine according to form A11,
The specific effect is a effect in which the display position of the specific image is gradually displaced from the first position to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, the development suggestion of the characteristic part 006SG In the presentation, the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R gradually moves upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, As shown in FIG. 14-27, in the revival performance of Modified Example 006SG-2, the fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside gradually move from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the periphery of the display area. The part that moves, the part where the decorative design and background image are gradually distorted to the left in the promotion production of modified example 006SG-5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to emphasize the displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific performance, so that the entertainment of the performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form A13 is the gaming machine described in form A11,
The specific image is composed of a plurality of image pieces (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-28, a part in which a decorative pattern is composed of a plurality of pieces),
The specific effect is an effect in which the number of the displayed image pieces increases step by step (for example, as shown in modification 006SG-2, a plurality of fragments constituting a decorative pattern inside (the part that increases in stages according to the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visual effect of increasing the number of image pieces in stages can strongly impress the player with a specific performance.

The gaming machine of form A14 is the gaming machine described in form A11,
The specific effect is a effect in which the ratio of the area where the specific image is displayed with respect to the display area increases in stages (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-28, the image display device 5 is (a portion where the proportion of the display area of the decorative design in the display area increases step by step),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the ratio of the area where the specific image is displayed to the display area increases in stages, thereby making it possible to more effectively draw the attention of the player to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A11 to A14,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
The storage means is capable of storing a plurality of display position displacement information having different displacement modes of the specific image (for example, a portion in which a plurality of displacement image data are stored in the CGROM 206),
The rate at which the specific image is controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the display position displacement information is displaced (for example, in the variable display with the super reach variation pattern, the left area 006SG005L, While displacement image data is used to slide the images of the middle area 006SG005C and right area 006SG005R to the third stage, in the variable display with the normal reach variation pattern, the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area Since displacement image data is used for the image of 006SG005R to slide to the first stage or second stage, the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion performance. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the displacement mode of the specific image in the specific performance, it is possible to improve the performance interest of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of form A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A11 to A15,
The plurality of pieces of display position displacement information include first display position change information in which the specific image changes from a first mode to a second mode different from the first mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, super reach Displacement image data for sliding the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R to the third stage) and the specific image change from the first aspect to the first aspect. Second display position change information that does not change in two modes (for example, as shown in Figure 14-22, in variable display with normal reach variation pattern, images of left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R are the first stage) or displacement image data for sliding to the second stage),
The first display position change information and the second display position change information include a common changing section in which the image processing means changes the specific image from the first aspect to the second aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21 and FIG. 14-22, when using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, In the case of using displacement image data in which the image of the right area 006SG005R slides to the first stage, the parts in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common, When using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage. In the case of using displacement image data, the parts in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage are common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the process in which the specific image changes from the first mode to the second mode as the specific performance, so that the performance interest of the specific performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, a lower area 006SG005B),
The performance execution means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. (a portion where a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the area), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displacement specific image (for example, As shown in 14-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),
After displaying the displacement specific image, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can be displaced (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(D) and 14-31(E)). After moving the upper region 006SG005T to the right and the lower region 006SG005B to the left, the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is further moved upward and downward, respectively),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the displacement specific image is displayed, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is further displaced, so that the production effect of the specific production can be enhanced, and the production is interesting. can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A18 is the gaming machine described in form A17,
The boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is different from at least one display area among the plurality of display areas including the first specific display area and the second specific display area. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(D) and 14-31(E), the upper region 006SG005T moves toward the right side, the lower region 006SG005B moves toward the left side, The boundary between area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B is a portion that moves in the vertical direction),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the synergistic effect of the displacement of the plurality of display areas and the displacement of the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can further enhance the production effect of the specific production.

The gaming machine of form A19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A18,
At least in the specific display layer, it is possible to arrange an image across an area corresponding to the display area and an area outside the area corresponding to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. At this time, the decorative pattern drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, and a part of the background image is moved outside the display area of the image display device 5. part to be placed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when displaying a displacement specific image in the display area as a specific effect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an inappropriate display will be performed in the display area.
In addition, in modification 006SG-5 of the present invention, when performing the promotion effect (specific effect), the displacement target image is enlarged so that the left and right width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5. Although form A is illustrated in which an image for promotion effect is created by applying a displacement image to the entire image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range to which the displacement image is applied in the displacement target image is , it is not necessary to displace only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

The gaming machine of form A20 is the gaming machine described in form A19,
The effect execution means is capable of enlarging an image displayed in the display area during a period in which the specific image is displaced from the first position to the second position as the specific effect (for example, according to progress of the promotion effect). (a part in which the decorative pattern drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged step by step),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display from being performed in the display area during the process up to displaying the displacement specific image while maintaining the production effect of the specific production.

The gaming machine of form A21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A20,
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, a lower area 006SG005B),
The effect execution means displays the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and displays the specific image in the first specific display area and the second specific display area as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose relative position with respect to the display area is displaced (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , the upper area 006SG005T is displayed moving toward the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is displayed moving toward the left side),
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are different (for example, As shown in modification example 006SG-3, the part where the image displayed by the hand in the upper area 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B are different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific performance can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, so it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A22 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A20,
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, a lower area 006SG005B),
The effect execution means displays the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and displays the specific image in the first specific display area and the second specific display area as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose relative position with respect to the display area is displaced (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , the upper area 006SG005T is displayed moving toward the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is displayed moving toward the left side),
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, at least a portion of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are (For example, as shown in modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left) (at least a part of which is common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to add surprise to a specific performance, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A23 is the gaming machine described in form A21 or form A22,
A part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the specific image is displayed is the first specific display when the displacement specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in modification 006SG-3, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 are A part of the image that is displayed across is not displayed as an image that is displayed across the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a pre-read preview effect. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further improve the performance interest of a specific performance.

The gaming machine of form A24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A23,
The display means is capable of displaying a stereoscopic image composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, an autostereoscopic image display device 5' is a portion where a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of a right eye image (R image) and a left eye image (L image) can be displayed),
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a stereoscopic effect that displays the stereoscopic image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-45(B), a portion where a preview effect during variable display can be displayed as a stereoscopic image),
When executing the specific effect, a non-stereoscopic image is displayed as the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-45(D), when executing the development suggestion effect, the development (The part where the image displayed as a suggestive effect is displayed as a two-dimensional image)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player's interest can be improved by the stereoscopic presentation, and since the displacement specific image is not displayed as the stereoscopic image in the specific presentation, the specific presentation can be carried out suitably.

The gaming machine of form A25 is the gaming machine described in form A24,
The right-eye image and the left-eye image are arranged in a stereoscopic display layer in which the arranged images are preferentially displayed in the display area than in the specific display layer.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when executing a specific effect, it is possible to suitably perform a stereoscopic effect.

The gaming machine of form A26 is the gaming machine described in form A24 or form A25,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the stereoscopic performance as an introductory performance of the specific performance during a period before the execution period of the specific performance during variable display;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by executing the stereoscopic presentation, the player can be made aware in advance that the specific presentation will be executed, so that the presentation effect of the specific presentation can be further improved.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, and the like. In the production control board 12, the production control CPU 120 operates according to a program stored in the built-in ROM 121, and receives production control commands via the input circuit 260. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit (VDP (video display processor)) 123 to perform display control of the image display device 5, such as generation of an image to be displayed on the image display device 5, based on the performance control command. Execute the process to

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the display control unit 123 controls characters (also called image data such as people, animals, characters, figures, symbols, etc., CG data), decorative designs, and backgrounds as image element data used as sprite images. Image, a first reservation memory display area 006SG005D that specifiably displays the first special symbol reservation memory number as game-related information in the main feature section 006SG, and a second reservation memory that specifiably displays the second special symbol reservation memory number. Displayed together with a CGROM 205 in which data such as a first interface image 006SG005I for displaying a display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are stored, and an SDRAM 210 (synchronous DRAM) used as a VRAM (video RAM) area. Configure the control circuit.

The performance control CPU 120 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to read necessary data from the CGROM 205 in which image data is stored in accordance with the received performance control command. The CGROM 205 stores in advance character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, image data of people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative designs), and background images. This is a ROM for storing. Note that the CGROM 205 in the feature section 006SG also stores a plurality of displacement image data for displacing the positions of pixels constituting the displacement target image to other positions by applying it to the displacement target image, which will be described later. There is. The display control unit 123 reads image data from the CGROM 205 in response to instructions from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 then executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 includes a system register 202 in which various settings of the display control unit 123 are stored, attributes (parameters used when drawing characters, such as character drawing order, number of colors, scaling ratio, an attribute register 203 that stores data specifying palette numbers, coordinates, etc.; a drawing control unit 206 that controls drawing of images to a drawing area in the VRAM area (described later); A data transfer control unit 211 that controls the transfer, video signals (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) for displaying image data stored in a display image creation area described later in the VRAM area. It is an integrated circuit equipped with a display control unit 213 that outputs a signal and a synchronization signal, a DA converter 214 that converts a video signal output from the display control unit 213 into an analog signal, and outputs the analog signal to the image display device 5.

A system bus and a CG bus are provided inside the display control unit 123, and the system bus and the CG bus are connected to the production control CPU 120 via a CPU interface 201, and an infrared camera 60 is connected. An image processing DSP 264 is connected. Furthermore, the CG bus is connected to the CGROM 205 via a CG bus interface 204. A system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and an attribute register 203 is connected to the CG bus, so that the production control CPU 120 can access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203.

Further, the drawing control unit 206, data transfer control unit 211, and display control unit 213 are connected to the system bus, and can access the system register 202. Further, the drawing control unit 206 and the data transfer control unit 211 are connected to the CG bus, and can access the CGROM 205 and the attribute register 203.

Further, a VRAM bus is further provided inside the display control unit 123, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 210 via a VRAM bus interface 209. A drawing control unit 206, a data transfer control unit 211, and a display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus, and the VRAM area of the SDRAM 210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

The system register 202 includes a system control register that stores instructions for initial settings, drawing, data transfer, etc., an interrupt control register that stores instructions for outputting interrupt signals (described later), a drawing area in the VRAM area, and arrangement of palette data. A drawing register that stores an area, a data transfer register that stores a source address, a destination address, etc. during data transfer, a display register that stores a display image creation area in the VRAM area, etc. are allocated.

The CPU interface 201 outputs a V blank interrupt signal to the production control CPU 120 every time a V blank (image update period) starts, and also outputs various other interrupt signals to the production control CPU 120. do.

The display control unit 213 performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this feature section 006SG, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, in one V blank, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. During this time, drawing will continue to be performed in the other area.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 14-2(a) and 14-2(b), in this feature section 006SG, an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created by superimposing (synthesizing) a plurality of layers. is being generated. The VRAM area includes a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of each layer, and images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are further superimposed (synthesized) and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image creation area for generating an image to be displayed is arranged (see FIG. 14-5). Note that each layer has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower layers, and images in higher layers are set to have higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layers have higher display priority on the image display device 5. is set low.

As shown in Figures 14-5 (A) and 14-5 (B), the VRAM area has a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 1 images, and a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 2 images. A layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the layer 3 image, and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the layer 3 image are arranged. Further, a displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image, which will be described later, and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

The displacement image creation area creates an image by superimposing (synthesizing) the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area as a displacement target image, This is an area in which a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to be described later to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area superimposes images drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, images drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and images drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area ( A display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area. This is the area to be created as an image for use.

Note that the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) in the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is the image display An image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are the highest in the image display device 5. Each is set to an image with a low display priority (display priority: low).

In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is the middle layer with lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority. It's a layer.

As shown in FIGS. 14-2(b) and 14-5(B), the layer 1 image drawing area displays the number of reserved first special figures in a manner that allows identification at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first interface image 006SG005I, which includes a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D for displaying the data and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U for specifyably displaying the number of reserved special figures, and in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, This is a drawing area where these images are drawn in order to display the second interface image 006SG005J that includes small patterns whose display area is smaller than the decorative patterns.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in which left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 in order to perform variable display of decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a background image is drawn in order to display the background image in the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this feature section 006SG, images drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), images drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and layer 3 image drawing area An image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing each of the images drawn and arranged in (layer 3 images). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J) are set to have the highest display priority, and therefore are the most The image (decoration pattern) that is displayed as an upper layer image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, so the image display device 5 The image (background image) that is displayed as a middle-layer image and drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to have the lowest display priority, and is therefore displayed as a low-layer image on the image display device 5.

In addition, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area in this feature section 006SG have a transparency of 0% so that when superimposed, the upper layer image makes the overlapping area of the lower layer image invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the image drawn and arranged in each image drawing area is set higher than 0%, and the image display device 5 An image that is transparently displayed in the display area or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

Next, a method for displacing the displacement target image in the feature section 006SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 14-3(A), a plurality of pixels having a red component value (R value) and a green component value (G value) are arranged in the displacement image applied to the displacement target image. These R value and G value each take a value in the range of 1 to 256.

Taking one pixel A among these plurality of pixels as an example, the display control unit 123 moves the image into the displacement target image from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image according to the R value and G value of the pixel A. The position of the pixel X to be displaced is specified from . Specifically, if the R value of pixel A is 1 to 127, the display control unit 123 displays the position moved in the negative direction (left direction) of the X axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image. is specified as the coordinate (position) of pixel X in the X-axis direction, and if the R value of pixel A is 129 to 256, move in the positive direction (rightward) of the The position of the pixel X is specified as the coordinate of the pixel X in the X-axis direction. Note that the amount of movement in the X-axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is the difference from 128, which is the median R value.

In addition, if the G value of pixel A is 1 to 127, the coordinate of pixel If the G value of pixel A is 129 to 256, the position moved in the positive direction (upward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is set in the Y axis direction of pixel X. Specify as the coordinates (position) of Note that the amount of movement in the Y-axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is the difference from 128, which is the median value of the G values.

After specifying the position of pixel X in the displacement target image, pixel X is designated as a pixel to be displayed at a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image. That is, pixel X is displaced to a position corresponding to pixel A. In other words, in this feature section 006SG, by individually adjusting the R value and G value of pixel A, it is possible to displace any pixel X to a position corresponding to pixel A, and also By adjusting the values to be the same, it is also possible to displace a specific pixel X, which is the same amount away from the position corresponding to pixel A, to the position corresponding to pixel A.

The display control unit 123 executes the above process for a plurality of pixels. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-3(B), the displacement image is divided into multiple regions with different R values and G values (displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, displacement image The displacement image is generated by applying each region to the displacement target image.

For example, as shown in Figures 14-4(A) to 14-4(C), the R value is 128 and the G value is any one of 1 to 127 as the area composing the displacement image. A certain displacement image a has an R value of 128 and a G value of 1 between 129 and 256. A displacement image b has an R value of 1 between 1 and 127 and a G value of 128. A certain displacement image c and a displacement image d having an R value of 1 from 129 to 256 and a G value of 128 are provided, and a triple circle image is set as a displacement target image.

In this case, as shown in Figure 14-4 (D), for the displacement image a, the range moved downward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image a in the displacement target image is converted into a displacement image. Specify the display range. In addition, as shown in Figure 14-4 (E), regarding the displacement image b, in the displacement target image, the range moved upward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image b is displayed in the displacement image. Specify a range. In addition, as shown in Figure 14-4 (F), regarding the displacement image c, in the displacement image, the range moved to the left by the difference in R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image c is Specify the display range. In addition, as shown in Figure 14-4 (G), regarding the displacement image d, in the displacement image, the position moved to the right by the difference in R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image d is Specify the display range.

As described above, the range specified from the displacement target image by the R value and G value of displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, and displacement image d is defined as displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image By displacing the image c and the displacement image d, a displacement image as shown in FIG. 14-4(H) is generated.

In addition, in this feature part 006SG, by setting either the R value or the G value of the displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, and displacement image d to a fixed value, these displacement images a, Although the boundaries of displacement image b, displacement image c, and displacement image d are clearly demarcated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, these displacement image a, displacement image b, and displacement image It is also possible to generate a gradation-like image as a displacement image by gradually varying the R value and G value of pixels near each boundary of the image c and the displacement image d.

FIG. 14-6(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this feature section 006SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 14-6(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-6(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 14-6 (B), determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot" (predetermined result). ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-6(B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 14-6(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 14-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 14-7, in this feature section 006SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a portion may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 14-8 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 006SG, a common special figure display result judgment table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result and a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table that will be used.

In the special figure display result determination table in this characteristic section 006SG, the special figure display results are determined depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used to determine whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this feature section 006SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 006SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 006SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state.

FIG. 14-9(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 006SG selects one of a plurality of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 006SG using FIG. 14-9(B), in this feature section 006SG, as jackpot types, high accuracy control and time saving control are performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state changes from the normal state. This is a so-called consecutive winning situation, which occurs continuously without any intervention.

On the other hand, the time saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 006SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-9(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 14-9 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 14-10 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 006SG. In this characteristic part 006SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, although this characteristic part 006SG provides one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition, in this feature part 006SG, two types of variation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are provided as super reach variation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two types of super reach variation patterns are provided. More than one type or only one type may be provided.

In addition, the super reach variation pattern in this feature section 006SG is a variation pattern of super reach α, a variation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-2), a variation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PA2-2), and a variation pattern of super reach β. As the fluctuation patterns, there are provided a fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a jackpot and a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14-10, the special symbol variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 006SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature part 006SG, the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In particular, the special figure variation time of the super reach β variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach α variation pattern. In other words, the super reach β variation pattern is set so that the expectation level of a jackpot where the variable display result is a “jackpot” is higher than the super reach α variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random numbers for determining the type of variation, and then the type of variation pattern is determined. A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Note that the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach variation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) in this feature section 006 are displayed during variable display. It is also a variation pattern that executes a performance that suggests the development of a super reach performance after a reach is established. In the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1), the variable display result is displayed without developing into the super reach reach effect after the development suggestion effect is executed, while the super reach variation pattern (PA2-2 , PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), the reach effect of super reach is executed after the execution of the development suggestion effect.

In addition, in this feature part 006SG, the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach variation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) are displayed during variable display. , exemplifies a form in which a development suggestion performance to a super reach reach performance is executed after a reach is established, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern are different from each other. A variation pattern may be provided in which the development suggestion effect is not executed. Note that when the development suggestion performance is executed, the rate of development to the super reach reach performance may be set higher than when the development suggestion performance is not executed.

FIG. 14-11 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 006SG. In this feature section 006SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-11, if the variable display result is a jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table. (Normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1-2 (Super reach α jackpot variation pattern), and PB1-3 (Super reach β jackpot variation pattern).

Specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 35%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the same jackpot variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the jackpot type. The present invention is not limited to the above, but includes a plurality of jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables with different determination ratios among PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3, and different jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables depending on the jackpot type. may be used to determine the variation pattern. By doing this, it is possible to create a variable pattern that is easily determined for each type of jackpot, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to which variable display of the variable pattern the variable display result is a jackpot, You can improve your interest in gaming.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α variation pattern), PA2 Determine from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, Determine PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table B, change the variation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach out), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α out), PA2 Determine from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, Determine PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using the variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach out), PA2-2 (variation pattern with out of super reach α), PA2 Determine from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, Determine PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. Determined from (Variation pattern for shortening time saving when non-reach is off), PA2-1 (Variation pattern when normal reach is off), PA2-2 (Variation pattern when super reach α is off), and PA2-3 (Variation pattern when super reach β is off) do.

Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table D, PA1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, Determine PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 006SG is "off", the special figure is Since the rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variation time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 006SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The data holding area for game control includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a regular figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control counter. It includes a setting section and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the holding number, and the first starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). Based on this, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc. as pending data. , are stored until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

The second special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the holding number, and the second starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). Based on this, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc. as pending data. , are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The standard figure holding storage section stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure reservation storage unit associates the game balls with the hold numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and is used for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number MR4 of is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting section, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and are periodically counted according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 14-1 is provided with, for example, a performance control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area shown in FIGS. 14-15(A) includes a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The effect control flag setting section includes a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations, such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values for each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 006SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section. The reception command buffer at the time of starting a winning is a storage area (corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4") of the first special figure reserved memory. A storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed is provided. In addition, the start winning command buffer has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special figure reserved memory. (an area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") and a storage area (an area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning prize designation command (first starting opening winning prize designation command or second starting opening winning prize designation command) and a pending storage number notification command ( The first pending memory number notification command or the second pending memory number notification command) are transmitted as one set from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning are associated with these starting opening winning designation command and pending memory number notification command, Storage areas (entries) are secured for separately storing the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when the process ends.

FIG. 14-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 14-12, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141;N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "1" Then, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 006 SGS142, the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, so that the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 006SGS144), the process moves to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation memory number is "0" (step 006SGS145) . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the game control counter setting section reads out the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. In this way, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 006SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation memory number is other than "0" at step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the reservation number "1" Then, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 006 SGS146, the first special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the first special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step 006SGS148), the process moves to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the special symbol display result judgment shown in FIG. Select and set the table. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006 SGS150a). In addition, in this step 006SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is in the ON state, the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is in a high probability state (probability variation state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off and the probability is low, if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it will be judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not, it will be judged as a "miss". judge.

In this way, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming state at that time (high accuracy, low accuracy). , In the process of step 006 SGS150a, the special figure display result is determined using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether the gaming state when variable display of the special figure game etc. is started is a high certainty state or not. By determining whether or not to be considered a "jackpot", when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-9(A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type is determined to be one of the plurality of types depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type of ``A'', ``Probable variable jackpot B'', and ``Probable variable jackpot C'' matches (Step 006 SGS154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006 SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. Whether to control or not is determined before the fixed special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (step 006SGS155), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "1", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

After step 006SGS155 ends, or if it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is not a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; N), it is determined whether to control the jackpot gaming state (whether the jackpot flag is turned on or not). A fixed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of (2) and the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 006SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of reserved memories of the special pattern game using the first special pattern is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step 006SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

FIG. 14-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161; Y), a jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 006SGS164).

In the determination at step 006SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 006SGS161; N), the gaming state is changed by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section. It is determined whether or not time saving control is being performed in which time saving control is performed in the state or time saving state (step 006 SGS168). If the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS168; Y), the failure variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of the plurality of variation patterns ( Step 006SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not turned on (step 006SGS168; N), for example, the stored value of the pending storage number counter for variable special symbols provided in the game control counter setting section By reading, etc., the number of pending memories of the variable special symbols is specified, and it is determined whether the number of pending memories of the identified variable special symbols is 1 or 2 (step 006 SGS170).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), the variation pattern determination table A for failure is used as a table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variation patterns. Select and set (step 006SGS171).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 006SGS172). ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 3 (step 006SGS172; Y), select the variation pattern determination table B for failure as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern as one of multiple types. (Step 006SGS173).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is not 3, that is, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is 4 (step 006SGS172; N), select one of the multiple types of variable patterns. As the table to be used for determining the deviation pattern, the error variation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 006SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS175.

After executing any of the processes in step 006SGS164, step 006SGS169, step 006SGS171, step 006SGS173, and step 006SGS174, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer etc. Based on the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special hit fluctuation pattern determination table, or loss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D, one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns can be selected. (Step 006SGS175).

Incidentally, when the jackpot flag is off, by determining the fluctuation pattern in the process of step 006SGS175, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach". That is, the process of step 006SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol should be set to the reach state when the variable display result is "miss".

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 006SGS175, a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 006 SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the process of step 006SGS176, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the variation of the special symbol (step 006SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting section sends setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in the send command buffer. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting section. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 006SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern is set (step 006SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. It's time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 006SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS177, each time the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. The designation command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command are sent in sequence. It turns out. The order in which these production control commands are sent can be changed arbitrarily, for example, the variable display result specification command is sent first, and then the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, and the variable pattern are sent. The designation command, the game state designation command, the first pending storage number notification command, or the second pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

FIG. 14-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process in step S112 to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 006SGS180). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 (step 006SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y) and the probability change flag and time saving flag are turned on, the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and time saving flag and turns them off (step 006SGS184). , hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), win start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), win start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), depending on the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. Settings are made to transmit the winning start 4 designation command (non-probable variable) (step 006 SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 006SGS187). Also, set the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot or a variable variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot C) in the number of openings counter. (Step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 006SGS189), which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S114), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), in step 006SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0" or not. If the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS190; Y), the process advances to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 006 SGS190; N), that is, if the number of time saving times remains and the high base state is reached, the value of the time saving number counter is -1 (step 006SGS190;N). 006SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 006SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 006SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is determined. is "0" (Step 006SGS193; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 006SGS194), and then the time-saving flag corresponding to the state of the variable probability flag or the time-saving flag is cleared. After setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (specifically, the low probability/low base state) (step 006SGS195), the process advances to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

14-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer. is set (step 006 SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 006SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006 SGS204). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probable variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the probability variable flag is turned on (step 006SGS207), the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS208), and the time saving number counter is set to "0". After setting (step 006SGS209), the process advances to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), step 006SGS211 and step 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set "100" to the time-saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and settings are made to send a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command to notify the production control board 12 of the gaming state based on the probability change flag and time saving flag that have been turned on (step 006 SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is specially set. It is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 006 SGS216).

Next, the operation of the production control CPU 120 will be explained. 14-16 is a part of the flowchart of the production control process shown in FIG. 13. In the performance control process processing, the performance control CPU 120 performs a background image change process (step 006SG162) for changing the background image displayed on the image display device 5 after executing the prefetch notice setting process (step S161) described above. ), and any one of steps S170 to S175 is executed.

As the background image change process, for example, the performance control CPU 120 changes the image display at the start timing of variable display (timing when the performance control process process is executed with the value of the performance control process flag set to 1). It is sufficient to decide to change the background image displayed on the device 5 at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%), and start displaying a new background image on the image display device 5 in accordance with the determination. In other words, in this feature section 006SG, when any one of a plurality of background images is displayed on the image display device 5, a variable display of the decorative pattern and an effect corresponding to the variable display are executed. There is.

In addition, in the background image change process, the production control CPU 120 changes when the gaming state changes (for example, from the normal state to the jackpot gaming state, from the jackpot gaming state to the probability change state or time saving state, from the probability change state or time saving state to the jackpot state or normal When the state changes), the image display device 5 may be able to display a background image corresponding to the game state to which the change is made.

FIG. 14-17 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the variable display performance process of the performance control process process. In the variable display production process, the production control CPU 120 uses a process timer according to the process table selected by the production control CPU 120 in accordance with the variation pattern in the variable display start setting process; Each value of the set variable display time timer and variable display control timer is decreased by 1 (step 006SGS901, step 006SGS902, step 006SGS903).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the process timer has timed out (step 006SGS906). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 006SGS907). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 006SGS908). In addition, the control state for the presentation device (performance component) is changed based on the contents of the next set process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation part control data, etc.) (Step 006SGS909). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the production device (for production control of the parts) is executed (step 006SGS910).

Next, it is checked whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921; Y), the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to display the next display screen of the decorative pattern at the center left (display switching of the previous decorative pattern). Image data for the screen to be displayed after 30 ms has elapsed from the point in time is created (step 006SGS922). In addition, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display is a variable display of a normal reach or super reach variation pattern (step 066SGS923).

If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach variation pattern (step 066SGS923; N), proceed to step 006SGS927; if the variable display is a normal reach or super reach variable display (step 006SGS923; Y), proceed to step 006SGS927. Furthermore, it is determined whether a display image processing flag, which will be described later, is on (step 006SGS924).

If the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS924; Y), proceed to step 006SGS926; if the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS924; N), check the contents of the process data being executed. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to start suggesting the development of Super Reach to reach effect (Step 006SGS925). If it is not the timing to start suggesting the development of Super Reach to the reach effect (Step 006SGS925; N), proceed to Step 006SGS927, and if it is the timing to start suggesting the development of Super Reach to the reach effect (Step 006SGS925; Y), proceed to Step 006SGS926. move on.

As step 006SGS926, the performance control CPU 120 executes a display image processing process for processing (displacing) a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and proceeds to step 006SGS927.

In step 006SGS927, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to execute a process of compositing (superimposing) the images created in the above-described steps 006SGS922 and 006SGS921 on the display image creation area of the VRAM 209. Then, the variable display control timer is reset (step 006SGS928). In this way, variable display control of decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs to the image display device 5 a signal based on an image obtained by superimposing an image such as a set background image and an image based on display control execution data set in the process table. In this manner, the background image, character image, decorative pattern, etc. in the variation of the decorative pattern are displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 14-19, the image displayed within the display area of the image display device 5 in this feature section 006SG includes a part of the background image and a position that has been pre-positioned so that it will be displayed within the display area. are the adjusted first interface image 006SG005I, second interface image 006SG005J, and decorative pattern. In particular, the background image in this feature section 006SG is drawn as an image that is longer in the horizontal and vertical width directions than the display area of the image display device 5, and the background image in the display area of the image display device 5 is The center portion of the image in the left and right width direction is displayed. In other words, in this feature section 006SG, at least the layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the background image, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area are larger in vertical width and horizontal width than the display area of the image display device 5. This is an area for drawing and arranging a long image, and the display area of the image display device 5 displays only a portion of the image that corresponds to the display area.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, an image whose vertical width dimension and horizontal width dimension are longer than the display area of the image display device 5 is drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area, displacement image creation area, and display image creation area. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the layer 3 image drawing area and the displacement image creation area are set to have a vertical width smaller than the display area of the image display device 5. While the display image creation area is used as an area for drawing and arranging images with long dimensions and horizontal width dimensions, the display image creation area is an image whose vertical width dimensions and left and right width dimensions are the same as the display area of the image display device 5. It may also be an image that is drawn and placed. In this case, out of the image (background image) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area or the displacement image creation area, only the part corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5 is placed in the display image creation area. The background image may be displayed in the display area of the display device 5.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 006SGS929). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is on (step 006 SGS930; Y), the value of the production control process flag is changed to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, once a pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control will stop the fluctuation, so for example, a fluctuation pattern designation command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards, etc. Even in such a case, when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol), the variable display of the decorative symbol can be ended.

FIG. 14-18 is a flowchart showing display image processing processing (step 006SGS926) during the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 14-17. In the display image processing process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS941). If the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS941; N), it is determined whether the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the super reach variation pattern (step 006SGS942). If the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach (step 006SGS942; Y), image data for displacement for successful development to super reach performance (for notification of execution of super reach performance) is selected. The process then proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS943).

Note that the image data for displacement in this feature section 006SG includes the displacement target image (in the case of this feature section 006SG, an image obtained by superimposing an image placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image placed in the layer 3 image drawing area). This is data in which displacement images to be applied to (images placed in the displacement image creation area) are arranged in chronological order.

In addition, when the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the normal reach variation pattern (step 006SGS942; N), the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 for failure to develop to the super reach performance (for notification of non-execution of the super reach performance). It is determined at a predetermined ratio which one of the displacement image data for super reach performance development failure A and the displacement image data for super reach performance development failure B to be selected as the displacement image data (step 006SGS944). For example, the selection of displacement image data for super reach effect development failure A may be determined at a rate of 50%, and the selection of displacement image data for super reach effect development failure B may be determined at a rate of 50%.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, two displacement image data, A for failure to develop super reach performance and displacement image data for B for failure to develop super reach performance, are used as displacement image data for failure to develop to super reach performance. Although a form in which displacement image data can be selected is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are three types of displacement image data that can be selected as displacement image data for failure to develop to super reach performance. There may be more than one.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the displacement image data for super reach performance development failure A has been determined in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945). If it is determined in step 006SGS944 that the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure A has been selected (step 006SGS945; Y), the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure A is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948. (Step 006SGS946), if it has been decided to select the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure B (step 006SGS945; N), select the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure B and step 006SGS948 (Step 006SGS947).

In step 006SGS948, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the display image processing flag. Then, the first displacement image is selected from the selected displacement image data (step 006SGS949), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS951.

Further, if the display image processing flag is on in step 006SGS941 (step 006SGS941; Y), the effect control CPU 120 selects the next displacement image from the selected displacement image data and proceeds to step 006SGS951 (step 006SGS941; Y). 006SGS950).

In step 006SGS951, the effect control CPU 120 executes displacement image drawing processing. In the displacement image drawing process, the effect control CPU 120, for example, draws an image placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image placed in the layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. 14-5 in the displacement image creation area. A process of creating a displacement image by creating a displacement target image by combining (superimposing) and applying the displacement image selected in step 006SGS949 or step 006SGS950 to the image may be executed.

After executing the displacement image drawing process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952). Whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image is determined by, for example, whether the displacement image selected in step 006SGS950 is the last displacement image in the displacement image data. do it.

If the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; Y), the display image processing flag is turned off to end the display image processing process (step 006SGS953), and the displacement image drawing process ends. If the displacement image created in is not the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; N), the display image processing process is ended without going through step 006SGS953.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in variable display of decorative patterns in the feature section 006SG will be described based on FIGS. 14-20 to 14-23. First, as shown in FIGS. 14-20(A) and 14-20(B), in this feature section 006SG, the display mode of the decorative symbols displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the gaming state. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (A), when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), a character image and a numerical image are combined as decorative symbols for the normal state. A decorative pattern is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-20(B), when the gaming state is a time-saving state (low-accuracy low base state or high-accuracy high base state), a time-saving state decoration with only numeric images is used as a decorative pattern. The pattern will be displayed.

In the variable display with the super reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 14-21 (A) and 14-21 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging depending on the combination of reach. After that, the inner decorative pattern with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. As shown in FIG. 14-21(C), the development suggestion effect is such that the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the left area 006SG005L that includes the left decorative pattern. , a middle area 006SG005C including the inner decorative pattern, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative pattern. Then, as shown in Figures 14-21(C) to 14-21(E), the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image included in the middle area 006SG005C) is gradually changed. A development notification pattern that notifies you that a super reach effect will develop from above by sliding downward (written as "Development!" as shown in Figures 14-21 (C) to 14-21 (E)) 2) is moved and displayed toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

Incidentally, the development notification symbol in the feature section 006SG is a symbol that is displayed only when the development suggestion performance is executed, and is not displayed during the execution period of other performances during variable display.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R ( The decorative pattern and background image on the right slide upward.

The amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in Figure 14-21 (C) and the second step shown in Figure 14-21 (D). The number increases as the number of stages progresses through the third stage shown in Figure 14-21(E).

When the third stage of sliding movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is completed, the image is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 (the center of the middle area 006SG005C). The movement of the development notification symbol is completed and the development of super reach to reach effect is announced.

On the other hand, in the variable display with the normal reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 14-22 (A) and 14-22 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging depending on the combination of reach. After that, the inner decorative pattern with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. As shown in FIG. 14-22(C), the development suggestion effect is such that the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the left area 006SG005L that includes the left decorative pattern. , a middle area 006SG005C including the inner decorative pattern, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative pattern. Then, as shown in Figures 14-22(C) to 14-22(E), the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image included in the middle area 006SG005C) is gradually changed. By sliding downward, a development notification pattern is displayed moving toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to notify that the super reach performance will develop from above.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R ( The decorative pattern and background image on the right slide upward.

The slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in Figure 14-22 (C) and the second step shown in Figure 14-22 (D). It will increase as you progress through the stages.

However, in the normal reach variable display, after the first slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is executed, or the second step slide movement is After execution, as shown in FIG. 14-22(E), the development suggestion effect ends without executing the third slide movement, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes to the image shown in FIG. The state returns to the state shown in -22(B), and the decorative pattern and small pattern stop at a combination indicating a miss.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 14-21(C) to 14-21(E), in this feature section 006SG, the amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R exemplifies a form in which the number increases as the stage progresses; however, the present invention is not limited to this. The amount of movement may decrease as the stages progress, or the amount of movement may increase or decrease only in any of the first to third stages.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, as an example of a development suggestion effect, each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is exemplified as being able to be moved and displayed up to three levels. However, the number of steps in which each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is slid as a development suggestion effect may be two or less or four or more.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-21(C) to 14-21(E), in this feature section 006SG, the sliding direction of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R is displayed in the middle area 006SG005C. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the sliding direction of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R is the middle area 006SG005C. It may be in the same direction as the image displayed on the screen.

Further, in the present feature section 006SG, an example is given in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced regarding the development suggestion performance when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), but the present invention The image displayed on the image display device 5 may also be displaced for the development suggestion performance when the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state). .

In addition, as a development suggestion effect in this feature section 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-23 (A) to 14-23 (E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first reserved storage display area. A first interface image 006SG005I including 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, and a decorative pattern including the development notification pattern described above is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the 3-image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is A displacement image is created by applying the displacement image to the image.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area are superimposed to display a display on the image display device 5. The image is now created.

In other words, as shown in FIGS. 14-21 and 14-22, the first interface image 006SG005I and The second interface image 006SG005J is an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and therefore is not subject to displacement. For this reason, the visibility from the player is reduced by moving the decorative pattern upward or downward in the display area of the image display device 5 as a development suggestion effect, while the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the display of the second interface image 006SG005J at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 is maintained at the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5, the visibility of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J is reduced. There isn't.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, in the variable display using the super reach variation pattern, the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage. On the other hand, in the variable display with the normal reach variation pattern, the displacement image data for the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is used to slide to the first or second stage. Image data is used. Here, as mentioned above, the variable display in the super reach variation pattern is set to have a higher proportion of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state than the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, so in this feature section 006SG, the development The rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled differs depending on the displacement image data used in the suggestion effect.

In addition, in the development suggestion production of this feature section 006SG, the left area 006SG005L contains the left decorative pattern, the middle area 006SG005C contains the middle decorative pattern, and the right area 006SG005R contains the right decorative pattern, and these left, middle, and right The decorative patterns, including characters and numbers, slide and move without being separated, so it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest of the development suggestion performance due to the separation of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns. ing.

Note that in this feature section 006SG, an example is shown in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R are moved upward or downward, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this. , only one or two of the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R may be moved upward or downward.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this feature section 006SG, image data for displaying decorative patterns and background images, and displacement image data for displacing the display positions of these decorative patterns and background images. Specific effects that change the display position of these decorative patterns and background images just by using them (development suggestion effect in characteristic part 006SG, reach suggestion effect in modification example 006SG-1, revival effect in modification example 006SG-2, modification example 006SG- 3, promotion performance in modification 006SG-5, temporary stop suggestion performance and temporary stop notification performance in modification 006SG-6), these specific performances can be executed using dedicated data. The amount of data stored in the CGROM 205 can be reduced compared to the case where the data is stored in the CGROM 205.

In particular, in this feature section 006SG, since it is possible to display a plurality of images as background images on the image display device 5, originally it would be possible to produce a specific effect depending on whether each background image is displayed or the variable display mode. The pattern must be stored in the CGROM 205 in advance, but in this feature section 006SG, the image displayed on the image display device 5 can be instantly displaced by simply using the displacement image data, so the pattern is stored in the CGROM 205. The amount of data can be reduced. In addition, in this feature section 006SG, as game related information, a first reservation storage display area 006SG005D that can specify the number of first reserved special symbols stored and a second reservation storage display area 006SG005U that can specify the number of second reserved special symbols stored. , and small symbols whose display area is smaller than the decorative symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game-related information includes information such as information indicating that the game state is time-saving. A fourth device that can specify that a firing promotion display or a variable display that prompts the player to launch (launch) the game ball toward the big prize opening or the gate 41 is in progress based on the state or probability change state. A pattern or the like may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority, that is, the main feature part 006SG Since this is a non-target image for image displacement in the development suggestion performance, the display position will not shift with the image of the left area 006SG005L, the image of the right area 006SG005R, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C, which are the displacement targets, and the development suggestion. It is possible to prevent game-related information such as the number of stored special symbols and the variable display of small symbols from becoming difficult for players to visually recognize when performing performances.

Further, among the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlappingly with the image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion performance. Since the display position of the second interface image 006SG005J itself does not change, the player can recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the second interface image 006SG005J without any discomfort. On the other hand, since the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R during the development suggestion performance, the player can A first method that accurately displays the number of stored first special symbols in the first interface image 006SG005I in a specifiable manner without being affected by the displacement (slide movement) of each image of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R. It is possible to recognize the pending memory display area 006SG005D and the second pending memory display area 006SG005U that specifiably displays the number of second special symbol pending memories.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-21 and 14-23, the decorative pattern is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion effect is executed, the decorative pattern is placed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. By moving upward or downward from the section, the visibility is reduced, which improves the performance effect of the development suggestion performance. Furthermore, the small designs are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion performance is executed, unlike decorative designs, they do not move from the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5, so visibility does not decrease. The player can easily understand the progress of the game by visually recognizing the small symbols even during execution of the development suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in Figure 14-21, the development suggestion effect of this feature section 006SG is such that the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R increases in stages. , while improving the performance effect of the development suggestion performance, it is possible to emphasize the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R at each stage, further improving the performance effect. can.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, in the variable display with the super reach variation pattern, the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage. While displacement image data is used, in the variable display with the normal reach variation pattern, the displacement image is used to slide the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R to the first or second stage. data is used, and the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion production. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of moving stages of the image, and it is possible to improve the performance interest of the development suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, when using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the left area 006SG005L, the middle area When using displacement image data in which the images of area 006SG005C and right area 006SG005R slide to the first step, the parts where the images of left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the first step are common. When using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R move to the second stage. In the case of using displacement image data that slides, the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R have the same part that slides to the second stage, so the left area 006SG005L is used as a development suggestion effect. , the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R can draw the player's attention to the process such as the number of steps in which the images slide, so that the entertainment of the development suggestion performance can be further improved.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

For example, in the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 14-24 and 14-25 as modification 006SG-1, it is suggested that the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 is a reach during variable display. It may also be possible to perform a reach suggestion effect.

The production mode of the reach suggestion production will be explained based on FIGS. 14-24 and 14-25. First, in the variable display with the normal reach or super reach variation pattern, as shown in Figures 14-24(A) to 14-24(C), the left ornament is displayed at the timing immediately before the left ornament stops. An effect image such as a character acts on the pattern, and the left decorative pattern stops. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the left decorative pattern is displayed in a distorted manner.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-24(D) to 14-24(F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative pattern at the timing immediately before the right decorative pattern stops, and the right decorative pattern The decorative pattern stops and becomes a reach. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the right decorative pattern is displayed in a distorted manner.

On the other hand, in a variable display with a non-reach variation pattern, as shown in Figures 14-25(A) to 14-25(C), the left decorative symbol is displayed at the timing immediately before the left decorative symbol stops. An effect image such as a character acts on the image, and the left decorative pattern stops. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the left decorative pattern is displayed in a distorted manner.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-25(D) to 14-25(F), an effect image such as a character acts on the right decorative pattern at the timing immediately before the right decorative pattern stops. A number of symbols that do not match the reach combination stop as decorative symbols. At this time, the decorative pattern on the right stops and becomes a reach. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the right decorative pattern is displayed without distortion.

In addition, as for the reach suggestion effect in this modified example 006SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 14-26(A) to 14-26(F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area is A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, an action image is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image drawing area is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn on. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-1, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is A displacement image is created by applying the displacement image to the image.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, a form in which reach suggestion performance can be executed in variable display of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reach suggestion performance may not be executed in part of the variable display of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, a form in which action images such as characters act on the left and right decorative patterns is exemplified as a reach suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. As the reach suggestion performance in the variable display of the reach variation pattern, a case may be provided in which the effect image acts on the decorative pattern only once (acts only on the left decorative pattern).

Furthermore, in this modification example 006SG-1, a form in which an action image such as a character acts on a decorative pattern as a reach suggestion effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple reach suggestion effects may be used. The effect image may be displayed, and the proportion of the reach may be changed depending on which effect image acts on the decorative pattern.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-1, in the case where a reach is not achieved even though an effect image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the effect image or the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern Although a form in which a part of the image is not distorted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an effect image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the effect image must be used regardless of whether or not it becomes a reach. A part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern on which the effect is applied may be distorted.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, when an effect image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, a part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern on which the effect image acts is distorted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an effect image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the display area overlaps with the decorative pattern on which the effect image acts. Only one of the parts of the background image may be distorted.

Further, in the feature section 213SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28 as modification 006SG-2, the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 is to use a decorative pattern that is once stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination. It may also be possible to perform a revival performance in which the characters change into a jackpot combination.

The performance mode of the revival performance will be explained based on FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28. First, in the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in Figure 14-27 (A), after the variable display result is suggested to be a hit as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, the decorative symbol is a hit. Wrong combinations are displayed oscillatingly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlappingly on the inner decoration pattern, and a plurality of inner decoration patterns are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. appears divided into pieces. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-27(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are displayed in an enlarged manner from the state shown in FIG. 14-27(B) as the second stage crack, and each fragment is displayed as an image. They move in different directions from the center of the device 5 so as to spread out.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-27(D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged from the state shown in FIG. 14-27(C) as the third stage crack, and each fragment is further enlarged. Move to spread.

Then, as a crack in the fourth stage, an image of fragments of the decorative pattern inside scattering is finally displayed, and then a new decorative pattern is displayed as the decorative pattern inside, indicating that it is a jackpot. Variable display stops.

On the other hand, in the case where the variable display result is a loss, as shown in Figure 14-28 (A), after the variable display result is suggested to be a loss as a reach effect for normal reach or super reach, the decorative pattern is displayed. The reach is displayed oscillatingly depending on the combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-28(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlappingly on the inner decoration pattern, and a plurality of inner decoration patterns are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. appears divided into pieces. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-28(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are displayed in an enlarged manner from the state shown in FIG. 14-28(B) as the second stage crack, and each fragment is displayed as an image. They move in different directions from the center of the device 5 so as to spread out.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-28(D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged and displayed as the third stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 14-28(C), and each fragment is further enlarged. Move to spread.

However, in a variable display in which the variable display result is incorrect, after the first stage cracking is performed, after the second stage cracking is performed, or after the third stage cracking is performed, The revival effect ends without the fourth stage cracking being executed, the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in FIG. 14-28(A), and the decorative pattern and small pattern are removed. Stop at the combination shown.

In addition, as a revival effect in this modified example 006SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 14-29(A) to 14-29(F), the first reserved memory display is displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area. A first interface image 006SG005I including area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, a crack effect image 006SG005H is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-2, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created using the image drawn in the layer 3 image rendering area, and a displacement image (middle image) is created by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image. An image in which the decorative pattern is divided into multiple pieces and each piece is displayed as if it were spread out is created.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the layer 4 A display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

In particular, in this modification 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside expands step by step as a revival effect. In other words, in the resurrection effect, the proportion of the display area of the decorative pattern inside the display area of the image display device 5 Since the number increases in stages, it is possible to more effectively draw the attention of the player to the revival performance by expanding the decorative symbols therein in stages.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, a mode is illustrated in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlappingly on the decorative pattern inside as a revival effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack effect image A plurality of display modes of 006SG005H may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot may be varied depending on which display mode the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed.

For example, as shown in Figure 14-30, blue and red are provided as the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H, and when the variable display result is a jackpot, the blue crack is displayed at a rate of 20% when the revival effect is executed. The effect image 006SG005H is displayed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed at a rate of 80% when the revival performance is executed. On the other hand, if the variable display result is incorrect, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H will be displayed when the revival effect is executed at a rate of 80%, and the red crack effect will be displayed when the resurrection effect is executed at a 20% rate. The image 006SG005H may be displayed.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, two colors, red and blue, are provided as the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H are Three or more colors may be provided.

In addition, in the present modification 006SG-2, a mode is exemplified in which a revival effect is executed when the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the revival performance may be executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, as shown in Figure 14-28, the decorative pattern inside is composed of a plurality of fragments in the resurrection performance, and the number of these fragments is maintained as the resurrection performance progresses. , an example is given in which the fragments are moved in stages from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the periphery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns in these The plurality of constituent fragments may be increased in stages as the revival performance progresses. By doing this, the resurrection performance can strongly impress the player with the visual effect that the number of fragments forming the inner decoration pattern increases as the resurrection performance progresses.

Furthermore, in the feature section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIG. 14-31 as modification 006SG-3, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a variable display is executed in a super reach variation pattern in the reserved memory. A look-ahead preview performance may be performed that suggests from a plurality of previous variable displays that a variable display in which the variable display result is a jackpot will be executed.

The appearance of the look-ahead preview effect will be explained based on FIG. 14-31. First, in a state where a plurality of pending memories exist, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(A) and 14-31(B), the variable display being executed stops when the combination of decorative symbols is out of order. Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(C) and 14-31(D), when the next variable display starts, a cutting effect that crosses the display area left and right in the display area of the image display device 5 is created. Image 006SG005S is displayed overlappingly with the decorative pattern and background image. Among the display areas displayed on the image display device 5, the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is divided into a lower lower area 006SG005B including the decorative pattern and a part of the background image, and the remaining area with the cutting effect image 006SG005S as the border. It is divided into an upper region 006SG005T containing a decorative pattern and a background image. In other words, the boundary between the lower region 006SG005B and the upper upper region 006SG005T is hidden from the player by the cutting effect image 006SG005S.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(D) to 14-31(E), the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S. Slide at the same time. The lower area 006SG005B, which has slid to the left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, further slides downward, and the upper area 006SG005T, which has slid to the right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, further slides upward. . At this time, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is moved and displayed on both the boundary on the lower region 006SG005B side and the boundary on the upper region 006SG005T side so as to follow.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(E) and 14-31(F), in the display area of the image display device 5, the lower area 006SG005B slides downward and the upper area 006SG005T slides upward. The display of a black image starts. The display area of the black image expands as the lower area 006SG005B slides downward and the upper area 006SG005T slides upward, and the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T move outside the display area. By completing the movement, the display area enters a so-called blackout state in which only the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are displayed.

Thereafter, when the blackout ends, display of a new background image and decorative pattern is started in the display area of the image display device 5. It should be noted that this pre-read preview performance is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the external pre-read target starts.

In addition, as for the pre-read preview effect in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in FIG. A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, a cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the drawing area. Furthermore, the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-3 includes a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing images in a lower layer than the layer 3 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing images in a lower layer. It is located. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a black image (blackout image) is drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image including the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T is created.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area, and the layer 5 A display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

As described above, in this modified example 006SG-3, in the pre-read preview performance as a specific performance in the present invention, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(C) and 14-31(D), The decorative pattern and the background image are displayed across the area 006SG005B, and the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left, and the border between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B moves. Since the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed, it is possible to more effectively make the player recognize the left and right movement of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B as the pre-read preview effect, and increase the interest in the game. can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figure 14-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern or background image, so the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area Since the display position of the cutting effect image 006SG005S does not change even if the display position with the area 006SG005B changes, the display position of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B can be changed by comparing the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B with the cutting effect image 006SG005S. The displacement can be made more conspicuous, and the performance effect of the pre-read preview performance can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(D) and 14-31(E), after moving the upper region 006SG005T toward the right side and the lower region 006SG005B toward the left side, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region By moving the boundary portions with 006SG005B upward and downward, respectively, it is possible to further enhance the performance effect of the preview preview performance and improve the interest of the performance. In particular, as a look-ahead preview effect, as shown in Figures 14-31(D) and 14-31(E), the upper area 006SG005T moves towards the right side, the lower area 006SG005B moves towards the left side, but the upper area 006SG005T moves towards the left side. Since the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction, the synergistic effect of the displacement (movement) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B and the displacement (movement) of the boundary can further enhance the performance effect of the pre-read preview performance. I can do it.

In this modification 006SG-3, the moving direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is a vertical direction that is different from the right side, which is the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T, and the left side, which is the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the moving direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the same as the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T and the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. It is sufficient if it is different from either one of them.

In this modification 006SG-3, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 as a pre-read preview effect, and the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T divided along the cutting effect image 006SG005S are moved and displayed. Although the present invention is not limited to this, a plurality of display modes of the cutting effect image 006SG005S are provided, and a variable display of the pre-read target is provided depending on which display mode the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed. The rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot may be varied.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, three types of display colors, blue, green, and red, are provided as the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and when the variable display result of the prefetch target is a jackpot, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed. It is displayed in blue at a rate of 10%, displayed in green at a rate of 30%, and displayed in red at a rate of 60%. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the prefetch target is incorrect, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue at a rate of 60%, green at a rate of 30%, and red at a rate of 10%. Bye.

By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S displayed during the pre-reading preview performance, so that the performance effect of the pre-reading preview performance can be further enhanced.

In this modified example 006SG-3, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is provided with three types of display colors, blue, green, and red. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cutting effect image 006SG005S The display colors of the image 006SG005S may be two colors or four or more colors. Furthermore, the ratio at which the variable display result of the prefetch target becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) may be varied depending on aspects other than color, such as the shape and size of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, the number of displayed cutting effect images 006SG005S, etc. .

Further, in the present modification example 006SG-3, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is divided into two areas along the cutting effect image 006SG005S as a pre-read preview effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be divided into three or more areas as a pre-read preview effect. In this case, the performance effect of the pre-read preview performance may be improved by varying the direction in which each area slides.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-3, a form in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved respectively is exemplified as a pre-read preview effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-read preview effect The region to be moved may be only one of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, the decorative pattern and the background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, and the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the left side The image is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to. Therefore, even if the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B are different, so the pre-read preview effect is This can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left At least a portion may be common to the image. By doing so, it is possible to add surprise to the pre-read preview performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification example 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(C) and 14-31(D), the upper area in the display area of the image display device 5 is The image displayed across 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is the same as the image displayed across the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left as a pre-read preview effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at a timing before the execution of the pre-read preview effect. A part of the image may not be displayed as an image that is displayed across the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a pre-read preview effect. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the performance interest of the pre-read preview performance.

In this modified example 006SG-3, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a preview effect (in FIG. 14-31(D), the upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the right side). When the upper region 006SG005T is moved to the left and the lower region 006SG005B is moved upward and the lower region 006SG005B is moved downward in FIG. It is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a preview effect, the amount of movement (displacement amount ) may be different. In this way, by varying the amount of movement of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B, which move in opposite directions as a pre-read preview effect, the performance effect of the pre-read preview effect can be further improved.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in FIG. 14-33, the proportion of the variable display result of the prefetch target being a jackpot is varied depending on the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, but the present invention However, the display color of the cut effect image 006SG005S may be changeable each time variable display is performed, as shown in FIG. 14-34 as a modification 006SG-4. In this case, the rate at which the variable display result of the prefetch target becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) may vary depending on the display color of the final cutting effect image 006SG005S or the display color change pattern.

Furthermore, in the feature section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIG. 14-35 as Modified Example 006SG-5, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, during the variable display, once there is a non-probable variable jackpot or a 2-round definite variable with a small number of rounds. A combination of decorative patterns in which decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates the type of jackpot, such as a jackpot, and then the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot, and then they finally stop. You may perform a promotion performance (also referred to as a re-lottery performance) that notifies you of the jackpot type.

The performance mode of the promotion performance will be explained based on FIG. 14-35. First, after announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot as a normal reach or super reach reach effect, as shown in Figure 14-35 (A), after these reach effects are finished, the decorative symbols are displayed as a non-probable variable jackpot or a 2-round guaranteed variable. A combination indicating a jackpot type that is relatively less advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot (in the example shown in FIG. 14-35(A), a combination of even numbers "2" indicating a variable jackpot) is displayed.

Then, as shown in Figure 14-35 (B), during the remaining period of the variable display, the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are displayed as promotion effects such as a 2-round probability-variable jackpot, a 5-round probability-variable jackpot, a 10-round probability-variable jackpot, etc. The combinations of decorative symbols of other jackpot types are variably displayed at a constant speed.

During execution of the promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 14-35(C) and 14-35(D), the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is directed leftward in two steps. It gets distorted.

Then, the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is a jackpot type that is more advantageous for the player than the jackpot type indicated by the initially displayed combination of decorative symbols (see Figure 14-35 (A)). In some cases, after the first or second stage distortion of the promotion performance, the decorative pattern stops at the combination of the corresponding jackpot type (in the example shown in FIG. 14-35(E), the combination of probability-variable jackpot). On the other hand, if the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is the same as the jackpot type indicated by the initially displayed combination of decorative symbols, the decorative symbol will be displayed after the first stage of distortion of the promotion effect. It stops at a combination of jackpot types (in the example shown in FIG. 14-35(F), a non-probable jackpot combination).

In addition, the "advantage for the player" between the jackpot types in this modification 006SG-5 refers to whether or not the game is controlled to a variable probability state after the jackpot game ends, or whether it is controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends. Refers to games with a different number of variable displays and games with a different number of rounds in a jackpot game.

As for the promotion effect in this modified example 006SG-5, as shown in FIGS. 14-36(A) to 14-36(E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has the first reserved memory display. A first interface image 006SG005I including area 006SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. The background image is drawn.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image is created in which the center portion in the vertical direction is distorted toward the left side.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area are superimposed and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image is now created.

Note that the display image displayed on the image display device 5 in this modified example 006SG-5 is an image that is longer than the display area of the image display device 5 in the left-right width direction and the top-bottom width direction, as in the characteristic portion 006SG. (See FIGS. 14-19). However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 14-37, the horizontal width dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is It may be the same as the dimension in the left and right width direction of the display area of the display device 5.

In this case, when the promotion effect is executed as described above, as shown in FIGS. When the central portion is distorted to the left, an image non-display area where no image is displayed is formed on the right side of the display area.

Therefore, in the case where the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. As shown in Figures 14-39 (A) to 14-39 (D), when performing promotion effects, decorative patterns drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and decorative patterns drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are By enlarging the placed background image or enlarging the displacement target image (background image and decorative pattern) created in the displacement image creation area, a part of the background image can be moved outside the display area of the image display device 5. Deploy. In this way, by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image, even if the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted to the left as a promotion effect, the right side of the image display device 5 As a result of being enlarged, a background image placed outside the display area of the image display device 5 will be displayed, which may cause inappropriate image display on the image display device 5, such as the formation of the above-mentioned image non-display area. It is possible to reduce the possibility that an inappropriate display will occur.

In addition, in FIG. 14-39, when the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted to the left as a promotion effect, an image non-display area where no image is displayed on the right side of the display area is shown. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which both the background image and the decorative pattern are enlarged in order to prevent the formation of image non-display areas, the present invention is not limited to this. In order to prevent this, only the background image may be enlarged.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, when performing the promotion effect, the displacement image is applied to the entire displacement target image enlarged so that the left and right width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which an image for promotion effect is created by applying the image, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not necessary to displace only the portion corresponding to the area, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-5, the promotion effect is executed when the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display area of the image display device 5. When doing so, an image non-display area is formed during execution of the promotion effect by enlarging the decorative pattern drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the present invention is not limited to this. The enlargement of the background image may be performed in stages according to the progress of the promotion effect (according to an increase in the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5). By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort caused by the sudden enlarged display of decorative patterns and background images on the image display device 5. Therefore, while maintaining the promotion effect, the display area of the image display device 5 can be reduced. In the process of increasing the distortion of the displayed image, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display such as display of an image non-display area on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the feature section 006SG, a form is exemplified in which a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of the super reach reach effect can be executed during variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, it is possible to perform a pseudo continuous performance including temporary stoppage and re-variable display of decorative symbols, and the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled (jackpot expectation level) may be varied depending on the number of executions of the pseudo continuous performance. .

In particular, in a variable display that executes such a pseudo-continuous effect, there is a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the decorative pattern will temporarily stop immediately before the temporary stop timing of the decorative pattern, or a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the decorative pattern will temporarily stop when the decorative pattern temporarily stops. It may also be possible to perform a temporary stop notification effect to notify temporary stop of the decorative pattern.

In addition, in the present modification example 006SG-5, when executing the promotion effect, by enlarging the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5, the display image can also be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the image non-display area is prevented from being formed during execution of the promotion effect by arranging a part of the image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image is previously promoted in the CGROM 205. Store an image that is larger in size than the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of this modification 006SG-5, at least the left and right width dimensions are longer than the left and right width dimensions of the display area of the image display device 5) as an image for presentation. Then, by drawing and arranging the image in the displacement image creation area or the display image creation area, it may be possible to prevent the image non-display portion from being formed during execution of the promotion effect.

Furthermore, in this modified example 006SG-5, when executing the promotion effect, by enlarging the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5, the display image can be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the image non-display area is prevented from being formed during execution of promotion effect by arranging a part of the image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, in the display image creation area, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 at a position outside the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of this modification 006SG-5, on the right outer side of the display area of the image display device 5). An image (non-display image) different from the displayed image (display image) may be placed adjacent to the displayed image. By doing so, when the promotion effect is executed, the display image and the non-display image are arranged adjacent to each other across the display area and non-display area of the image display device 5, so that the image is replaced with the non-display area. A part of the hidden image will be displayed.

In the feature section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 14-40 to 14-42 as modified example 006SG-6, these temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects are used as effects to displace the image displayed on the image display device 5. May be executed.

The performance mode of the temporary stop suggestion performance will be explained based on FIG. 14-40. First, as shown in FIG. 14-40(A), when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display, the left and right decorative symbols stop (swinging stops) and become a reach. Thereafter, as a temporary stop suggestion effect, a pseudo-continuous pattern (a pattern displayed as "NEXT"), which is a part of the decorative pattern, moves from the top to the bottom. At this time, on the image display device 5, the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed so as to converge from the periphery of the display area toward the center of the display area, and the images surrounding the ripple effect image 006SG005P ( The left and right decorative patterns and background images are displayed distorted.

If the variable display is a variable display that performs a pseudo-continuous performance (a variable display in which the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop), as shown in FIG. 14-40 (B), the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop and , a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display that does not perform a pseudo-continuous effect (a variable display in which the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop), as shown in Figure 14-40 (C), the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as it is. It moves to the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5 and disappears from display, and a symbol indicating that the variable display result is a failure is displayed as a decorative symbol inside.

In addition, in this modification example 006SG-6, as shown in FIG. 14-40, by displaying the ripple effect image 006SG005P on the image display device 5, a form that suggests that the decorative pattern (pseudo continuous pattern) is temporarily stopped is provided. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display modes of the ripple effect image 006SG005P are provided, and it is determined in which display mode the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo-association suggestion effect. Accordingly, the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo continuous pattern) temporarily stops may be varied.

For example, in FIG. 14-40, two ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed (double display) as a pseudo-association suggestion effect, but as shown in FIG. 14-41, ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed as a pseudo-association suggestion effect. It is sufficient to provide a case where only one is displayed, and to vary the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo continuous pattern) temporarily stops depending on the number of ripple effect images 006SG005P displayed in the pseudo continuous effect.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-6, the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed as a part of the decorative pattern, that is, the pseudo continuous pattern is a pattern that is displayed as part of the variable display even in periods other than the pseudo continuous performance. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the pseudo-continuous pattern may be a pattern different from the decorative pattern, and may be a special pattern that is displayed only during the pseudo-continuous performance.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14-42 (A) and 14-42 (B), the temporary stop notification effect is such that after the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed. The ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed so as to be diffused from the center of the display area to the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5, and images around the ripple effect image 006SG005P (left and right decorative patterns and background images) are distorted. Is displayed.

The temporary stop suggestion effect and temporary stop notification effect in this modified example 006SG-6 are as shown in Figures 14-43 (A) to 14-43 (F), in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area. , a first interface image 006SG005I including a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, and a ripple effect image 006SG005P is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. A decorative pattern including a pseudo continuous pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-6. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created using the image drawn in the layer 3 image rendering area, and a displacement image (ripples) is created by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image. A distorted decorative pattern and background image) are created using the effect image 006SG005P.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

In addition, in the feature section 006GS, a mode in which the effect image is displayed using the image display device 5 capable of displaying only a two-dimensional image has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the modification 006SG- As shown in FIG. 14-44 and FIG. 14-45 as 7, the effect image may be displayed using a display device capable of displaying a stereoscopic image.

Modified example 006SG-7 will be explained below. Note that in the above-described characteristic part 006SG and the modified examples, the image display device 5 is a display device such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) capable of displaying a two-dimensional image (2D image). However, in this modified example 006SG-7, as shown in FIG. 14-44, an autostereoscopic image display device 5 that allows a player to view a stereoscopic image with the naked eye by a parallax barrier method is used. The feature is that by using ', stereoscopic images (3D images) can be displayed in addition to monoscopic images (2D images) as various images.

As shown in FIG. 14-44, the autostereoscopic image display device 5' of this modified example 006SG-7 is a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of a right eye image (R image) and a left eye image (L image). an image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 capable of displaying images, a backlight 006SG901 that emits planar light from the back to the front of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and an image liquid crystal panel on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900. 006SG900 and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 provided at a predetermined interval.

The parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 allows the player's left eye to visually recognize the right eye image (R image) displayed in a vertical strip shape on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and the left eye image (L image) to be viewed by the player's right eye. The player has a vertically striped black part that acts as a shutter to prevent the player from viewing the image, and a transparent part that allows the right eye image to be seen by the player's right eye and the left eye image to be seen by the player's left eye. A relatively highly optically transparent liquid crystal capable of displaying a parallax barrier image in a parallax barrier image display state and a transmissive display state in which all pixels are transparent without vertical striped black areas. It is considered a panel.

Note that the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 displays, for example, a right eye image (R image) instead of the left eye image (L image), and the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 does not display the above-mentioned parallax barrier image ( By using a fully transparent display), a two-dimensional image (2D image) can also be displayed.

In other words, the autostereoscopic image display device 5', which is the display means of the present modification 006SG-7, is composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in addition to a monoscopic image (2D image) that is a non-stereoscopic image. It is possible to display autostereoscopic images.

Note that the stereoscopic image consisting of the right-eye image and the left-eye image displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 is also drawn in the above-mentioned layers like the monoscopic image (2D image), while the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel The parallax barrier image displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is drawn on a dedicated layer provided exclusively for the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 and displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910.

When displaying an effect image using such an autostereoscopic image display device 5', other effects may be stereoscopically displayed at a timing different from the specific effect (for example, development suggestion effect) in the present invention during variable display. It may also be possible to perform this by displaying a visual image (3D image).

As shown in FIG. 14-45 (A) to FIG. 14-45 (D), during variable display, the autostereoscopic image display device 5' displays an image that moves upward, which is a displacement specific image, as described above. It is possible to perform a development suggestion performance, which is a specific performance in which images of the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R that have been moved, and an image of the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward, can be executed, and the development suggestion performance has a different execution period. A variable display preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot is executed as a non-overlapping preview performance, and a stereoscopic image is displayed in the variable display preview performance.

In other words, a development suggestion effect is executed, which is a specific effect in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R that have moved upward, which are displacement specific images, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward are displayed. In this case, only a monoscopic image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, is displayed, and a stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed.

When the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R that have moved upward, which are displacement specific images, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward are displayed in this way, the display is displayed in a non-stereoscopic manner. By using a two-dimensional image (2D image) as an image, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the displacement is due to a stereoscopic image, which reduces the interest of the performance. It can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the effects of displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) and the images of the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R that have moved upward, which are displacement specific images, and the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward Since the execution period of the image is different from the development suggestion performance, which is a specific performance that is displayed, the display of stereoscopic images (3D images) is restricted based on the execution period of the performance. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when displaying a displacement specific image and a stereoscopic image (3D image) during the same performance, the stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed while the displacement specific image is displayed. In order to prevent the displacement specific image from being displayed, data such as a display flag that can identify that a displacement specific image is being displayed is stored, and based on this data, a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed. The display may be restricted. In addition, regarding these restrictions, in order to prevent stereoscopic images (3D images) from being displayed immediately after or just before the display of the displacement specific image ends, there are certain restrictions before and after the period in which the displacement specific image is displayed. Also during the period, display of stereoscopic images (3D images) may be restricted by storing data such as a display flag.

In addition, although the above-mentioned modification 006SG-7 exemplifies a parallax barrier type autostereoscopic image display device 5' using the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed using an autostereoscopic image display device using a lenticular lens method or an integral imaging method other than the parallax barrier method.

In addition, although this modified example 006SG0-7 exemplifies a form in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed in the development suggestion performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and stereoscopic vision is also displayed in the development suggestion performance. There may also be a case where an image (3D image) is displayed. In addition, when displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) in the exhibition presentation, the images (right eye image and left eye image) of the stereoscopic image (3D image) are drawn and the monoscopic image (2D image) is It is sufficient to draw and arrange the image in an image drawing area (for example, layer 1 image drawing area) higher than the image drawing area to be placed. By doing this, the stereoscopic image (3D image) will be displayed with priority over the monoscopic image (2D image), so the stereoscopic image (3D image) will be suitably displayed in the development suggestion performance. can do.

In addition, in this modification example 006SG-7, as a performance for displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image), a variable display preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot is different from the development suggestion performance (specific performance). Although the embodiment has been exemplified in a form that can be executed during the period, the present invention is not limited to this. A stereoscopic image (3D image) may also be displayed. By doing this, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that the development suggestion performance (specific performance) will be executed by displaying the stereoscopic image (3D image), so the development suggestion performance (specific performance) The production effect can be further improved. Furthermore, a plurality of presentation modes are provided for the introduction presentation and development suggestion presentation (specific presentation), and the presentation presentation for the development suggestion presentation (specific presentation) is determined depending on which presentation presentation mode the introduction presentation is performed. It may be different.

Furthermore, in the introduction performance, the movable body 32 is operated, and the movement of the movable body 32 and the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) are linked to produce the performance effects of the introduction performance and the development suggestion performance (specific performance). may be improved.

Further, in the feature section 006SG, an example is given in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

In addition, when the present invention is applied to a slot machine, as shown in FIG. 14-46 as a modification 006SG-8, the game-related information in the present invention (the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface in the feature section 006SG) (corresponding to image 006SG005J), a medal payout display, an AT (assist time) remaining game number display, a medal display stored as credits, etc. are displayed on the image display device 5 along with the performance image, and these game-related information are displayed. It is sufficient to use an image that is not subject to displacement.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modification example, as a specific effect of the present invention, a form of effect that changes or distorts (distorts) the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is exemplified, but The present invention is not limited to this, and as the specific effect, the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed or distorted repeatedly.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modification example, the development suggestion performance, the reach suggestion performance, the revival performance, the advance notice performance, the promotion performance, the temporary stop suggestion performance, and the temporary stop notification performance are exemplified as specific performances in the present invention, A plurality of performances may be possible as these specific performances. In addition, in the case where a plurality of specific effects can be executed in this way, for example, in the normal state, it is possible to execute an effect in which decorative patterns (characters and numbers) are not separated, such as a development suggestion effect, in the normal state. On the other hand, a performance in which a decorative pattern (numbers only) is divided into a plurality of pieces or display areas may be performed, such as a revival performance or a look-ahead preview performance. By doing this, in the normal state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of a specific performance due to the fact that the decorative patterns containing characters and numbers are not separated, and in the time-saving state, on the contrary, the decorative patterns containing only numbers can be prevented. By dividing, the performance effect of a specific performance can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 006SG, the decorative pattern is composed of characters and numbers in the normal state, and the decorative pattern is composed of only numbers in the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display mode of the decorative pattern may be changed from the middle of the variable display in a specific variation pattern such as the variable display in the super reach variation pattern. For example, in the variable display of Super Reach, a decorative pattern consisting of characters and numbers is displayed variablely during the period from the start of the variable display until reaching the reach, and after reaching the reach, a decorative pattern consisting only of numbers is displayed. All you have to do is display the variable. Furthermore, in the period after the reach, as a specific performance in the present invention, a performance in which decorative symbols are divided, such as a resurrection performance, may be made possible.

Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 006SG and each modification example, an example is given in which an image in which at least a part of the specific image according to the present invention is displaced in the horizontal direction or vertical direction is displayed on the image display device 5 as a displacement specific image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image in which at least a portion of the specific image is enlarged or reduced may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a displacement specific image. That is, the image displacement direction in the present invention may include the enlargement/reduction direction (Z-axis direction) in addition to the left-right direction (X-axis direction) and the up-down direction (Y-axis direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-3 and 14-4, in the displacement target image, from the position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image, according to the R value and G value of the pixel A, Although the form of generating a displacement image using a replacement method in which a pixel X is identified and the pixel X is displaced (replaced) to a position corresponding to a pixel A of a displacement image has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, in a displacement target image, a displacement image is created using a method (moving method) in which pixel X at a position corresponding to pixel A of the displacement image is moved to a position according to the R value and G value of the pixel A. May be generated. In addition, in the replacement method, as in Modified Example 006SG-3, it is necessary to edit the displacement image of the area close to the boundary into a displacement image that takes into account the width of the boundary between areas with different moving directions. On the other hand, in the case of the replacement method, there is no need to perform these edits, so it is possible to reduce the video creation load, and when placing an effect image etc. at the boundary, it is necessary to set the boundary where the effect image is placed. Since the degree of freedom can be increased, the burden of creating video including effect images can be reduced.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 CPU for performance control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
sound output means;
a display means having a display area capable of displaying an image and capable of displaying a display image of game-related information regarding the progress of the game in the display area;
a storage means capable of storing image data including at least a specific image displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means having a plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers; ,
A light emitting means;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state;
The display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area,
The specific performance is
The display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is announced as a performance result. including,
The performance execution means is
In the first display area, the effect video can be displayed,
In the second display area, information regarding the game can be displayed;
In the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed in the first display area,
In the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means is emitted at shorter intervals than in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode of
In the second period, after displaying the effect video progressing at the second speed, it is possible to perform a still effect that displays a still image obtained by freezing the effect video,
There are multiple production modes of the static production,
Depending on which presentation mode the static presentation is, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs,
The performance execution means is
The information display can be displayed in an operative manner,
Continuing the information display operation even while the static presentation is being executed;
A gaming machine characterized by: